advertisement
NetSure
™
-48V DC Power System
User Instructions
Section 5877 (Issue AQ, January 15, 2013)
SPEC. NO. MODEL
582140000
802 NLDB
802 NLEB
802 NL B
Business-Critical Continuity ™, Emerson Network Power, and the Emerson Network
Power logo are trademarks and service marks of Emerson Electric Co.
Lorain
®
and Vortex
®
are registered trademarks of Emerson
Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
NetSure ™, NetSpan™, NetReach™, NetXtend™, and NetPerform™ are trademarks of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
The products covered by this instruction manual are manufactured and/or sold by Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and may not be suitable for all applications. While every precaution has been taken to ensure the accuracy and completeness of this document, Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. assumes no responsibility and disclaims all liability for damages resulting from use of this information or for any errors or omissions. Refer to other local practices or building codes as applicable for the correct methods, tools, and materials to be used in performing procedures not specifically described in this document.
This document is the property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Copyright
©
2013, Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc.
All rights reserved throughout the world.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
STATIC WARNING
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
The printed circuit cards used in this equipment contain static sensitive components. The warnings listed below must be observed to prevent damage to these components. Disregarding any of these warnings may result in personal injury or damage to the equipment.
1. Strictly adhere to the procedures provided in this document.
2. Before touching any static sensitive component or printed circuit card containing such a component, discharge all static electricity from yourself by wearing a wrist strap grounded through a one megohm resistor. Some wrist straps, such as Emerson Network Power Part Number 631810600, have a built-in one megohm resistor; no external resistor is necessary. Read and follow wrist strap manufacturer’s instructions outlining use of a specific wrist strap.
3. Do not touch the traces or components on a printed circuit card containing static sensitive components.
Handle the printed circuit card only by the edges that do not have connector pads.
4. After removing a printed circuit card containing a static sensitive component, place the printed circuit card only on conductive or anti-static material such as conductive foam, conductive plastic, or aluminum foil.
Do not use ordinary Styrofoam or ordinary plastic.
5. Store and ship static sensitive devices or printed circuit cards containing such components only in static shielding containers.
6. If necessary to repair a printed circuit card containing a static sensitive component, wear an appropriately grounded wrist strap, work on a conductive surface, use a grounded soldering iron, and use grounded test equipment.
Static Warning Page 1 of 2
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 2 of 2 Static Warning
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
FCC INFORMATION
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
The MCA Interface Modem Option (if installed) has been granted a registration number by the Federal
Communications Commission, under Part 68 rules and regulations for direct connection to the telephone lines. In order to comply with these FCC rules, the following instructions must be carefully read and applicable portions followed completely: a) Direct connection to the telephone lines may be made only through the standard plug- ended cord furnished to the utility-installed jack. No connection may be made to party or coin phone lines. Prior to connecting the device to the telephone lines, you must: b) Call your telephone company and inform them you have an FCC registered device you desire to connect to their telephone lines. Give them the number(s) of the line(s) to be used, the make and model of the device, the FCC registration number and ringer equivalence. This information will be found on the device or enclosed with instructions as well as the jack suitable for your device. c) After the telephone company has been advised of the above you may connect your device if the jack is available, or after the telephone company has made the installation. d) Repairs may be made only by the manufacturer or his authorized service agency. Unauthorized repairs void registration and warranty. Contact seller or manufacturer for details of permissible user performed routine repairs, and where and how to have other than routine repairs. e) If, through abnormal circumstances, harm to the telephone lines is caused, it should be unplugged until it can be determined if your device or the telephone line is the source. If your device is the source, it should not be reconnected until necessary repairs are effected. f) Should the telephone company notify you that your device is causing harm, the device should be unplugged. The telephone company will, where practicable, notify you, that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. However, where prior notice is not practicable, the telephone company may temporarily discontinue service, if such action is reasonably necessary, in such cases the telephone company must (A) Promptly notify you of such temporary discontinuance, (B) Afford you the opportunity to correct the condition and (C) Inform you of your rights to bring a complaint to the FCC under their rules. g) The telephone company may make changes in its communications facilities, equipment, operations or procedures, where such action is reasonably required in the operation of its business and is not inconsistent with FCC rules. If such changes can be reasonably expected to render any customer’s devices incompatible with telephone company facilities, or require modification or alteration, or otherwise materially affect its performance, written notification must be given to the user, to allow uninterrupted service.
The following information is provided here and on a label attached to the outside of the MCA Interface Modem
Option (if installed).
JACK
RJ-11
RINGER EQUIVALENCE FCC REGISTRATION NUMBER
0.2A B46USA-22429-MM-E
FCC Information Page 1 of 2
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 2 of 2 FCC Information
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CONTENTS PAGE
CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW ....................................................................................... 1-1
Preface ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-2
System Description .......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
System Overview Illustrations .......................................................................................................................... 1-6
Power/Distribution Bay .............................................................................................................................. 1-6
Power Only Bay ......................................................................................................................................... 1-7
Distribution Only Bay ................................................................................................................................. 1-8
Detail A - Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card .................................................................................... 1-9
Detail B - System Monitoring and Control Section .................................................................................. 1-10
Detail C - Monitoring and Control Section (Distribution Only Bays) ........................................................ 1-11
Detail D - Front Door (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays) MCA Control Panel and
Display ..................................................................................................................................................... 1-12
Detail E - MCA Circuit Card (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays) and Router Circuit
Card (Secondary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays and Distribution Only Bays) ...................... 1-13
Detail F .................................................................................................................................................... 1-14
Details G - MCA I/O Circuit Cards ........................................................................................................... 1-15
Detail H - LMS I/O Circuit Cards .............................................................................................................. 1-16
Detail J - Rectifier .................................................................................................................................... 1-24
CHAPTER 2 NAVIGATING THE MCA................................................................................... 2-1
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES ........................................................... 3-1
LMS Operating Procedures.............................................................................................................................. 3-2
LMS Local Port ................................................................................................................................................. 3-2
Installing the USB Device Driver from the Furnished CD .......................................................................... 3-2
Downloading the USB Driver from the Web .............................................................................................. 3-3
Setting up your Computer to Access the Power System........................................................................... 3-3
Local Controls and Indicators........................................................................................................................... 3-3
Location and Identification ......................................................................................................................... 3-3
LMS Main/Expansion CPU Circuit Card (if furnished) Controls and Indicators ........................................ 3-3
Bay LED Indicator ...................................................................................................................................... 3-4
Distribution Bus LED Indicator ................................................................................................................... 3-4
MCA Component LED Indicator ................................................................................................................ 3-4
Bay Monitoring and Control Section Indicators ......................................................................................... 3-4
MCA Controls and Indicators ..................................................................................................................... 3-5
MCA Display .............................................................................................................................................. 3-6
Surge Suppression Alarms (available only if a Surge Suppression Option is furnished) .......................... 3-6
Rectifier Controls and Indicators ............................................................................................................... 3-7
208V and 480V Input Rectifiers .......................................................................................................... 3-7
External Alarms ................................................................................................................................................ 3-8
Starting and Stopping System Operation ......................................................................................................... 3-8
Rectifier Normal Starting Procedure .......................................................................................................... 3-8
Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Local)......................................................................................................... 3-8
Table of Contents Page i
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Complete Shutdown ............................................................................................................................ 3-8
Local TR Shutdown ............................................................................................................................. 3-8
Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Remote) (if optional LMS installed) ........................................................... 3-8
Restarting Procedures when Rectifier is Automatically or Manually Inhibited, Shut Down, or Locked
Out .................................................................................................................................................................... 3-9
Rectifier High Voltage Shutdown Lockout ................................................................................................. 3-9
Rectifier Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect ..................................................................... 3-9
Remote On/Off (TR) .................................................................................................................................. 3-9
Output Voltage Mode of Operation Selection .................................................................................................. 3-9
Placing the System into the Float Mode of Operation ............................................................................... 3-9
Placing the System into the Test/Equalize Mode of Operation ............................................................... 3-10
Method 1 (Manual Test/Equalize) Procedure ................................................................................... 3-10
Method 2 (Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize) Procedure ........................................................ 3-12
Method 3 (Automatic Test/Equalize) Procedure ............................................................................... 3-14
Method 4 (External Test/Equalize) Procedure .................................................................................. 3-16
Setting MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset Time Period .................................................................................. 3-17
Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 3-17
Setting Rectifier Sequencing Delay Time Period ........................................................................................... 3-18
Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 3-18
Setting MCA Custom Text Messages (Names) ............................................................................................. 3-19
Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 3-19
Mapping LMS LED Channels to the MCA Display and MCA Customer Alarm Relays ................................. 3-20
Procedure .......................................................................................................................................... 3-20
Using the Alarm Relay Test Feature .............................................................................................................. 3-20
MCA “Power Share” Feature.......................................................................................................................... 3-21
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3-21
Operating Modes ..................................................................................................................................... 3-21
Low Load Operation .......................................................................................................................... 3-21
Normal Load Operation ..................................................................................................................... 3-21
High Load Operation ......................................................................................................................... 3-21
Overload Operation ........................................................................................................................... 3-21
Requirements and Conditions ................................................................................................................. 3-21
Programming the MCA Power Share Feature in the New Power System .............................................. 3-22
Enabling Power Share ...................................................................................................................... 3-22
Setting the Power Share Initial Capacity Limit .................................................................................. 3-22
Setting the Power Share Voltage Offset ........................................................................................... 3-23
Verifying the Operation of the Power Share Feature .............................................................................. 3-23
MCA “ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT” FEATURE ........................................................................................ 3-25
Description ............................................................................................................................................... 3-25
Operating Modes ..................................................................................................................................... 3-25
Normal Current Limit Operation ........................................................................................................ 3-25
Alternate Current Limit Operation ..................................................................................................... 3-25
Requirements and Conditions ................................................................................................................. 3-25
Programming the MCA Alternate Current Limit Feature ......................................................................... 3-25
Enabling Alternate Current Limit ....................................................................................................... 3-25
Page ii Table of Contents
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Setting the Alternate Current Limit Initial Capacity Limit ................................................................... 3-26
CHAPTER 4 MCA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS ....................................................................... 4-1
Adjustment Location and Identification ............................................................................................................ 4-2
Adjusting Float Output Voltage ........................................................................................................................ 4-3
Adjusting Test/Equalize Output Voltage .......................................................................................................... 4-4
Adjusting High Voltage Shutdown .................................................................................................................... 4-5
Adjusting Rectifier Current Limit ...................................................................................................................... 4-6
Adjusting System High Voltage Alarm 1 .......................................................................................................... 4-7
Adjusting System High Voltage Alarm 2 .......................................................................................................... 4-8
Adjusting System Battery On Discharge Alarm ............................................................................................... 4-9
Adjusting System Very Low Voltage Alarm .................................................................................................... 4-10
Adjusting Total Distribution Load Alarm ......................................................................................................... 4-11
Adjusting Distribution Group A Load Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-12
Adjusting Distribution Group B Load Alarm ................................................................................................... 4-13
Adjusting Battery Ambient High Temperature #1 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation Probe is installed) .................................................................................................................. 4-14
Adjusting Battery Ambient High Temperature #2 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation Probe is installed) .................................................................................................................. 4-15
Adjusting Battery Ambient Low Temperature #1 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation Probe is installed) .................................................................................................................. 4-16
Adjusting Battery Ambient Low Temperature #2 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation Probe is installed) .................................................................................................................. 4-17
Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Slope ........................................................ 4-18
Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Maximum Voltage .................................... 4-19
Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Minimum Voltage ..................................... 4-20
Configuring Degree Units Displayed ( F or C) ............................................................................................. 4-21
Configuring the System Date and Time ......................................................................................................... 4-22
Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Analog Input(s) ........................................................................................ 4-23
Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Analog Output(s) ..................................................................................... 4-25
Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Binary Input(s) ......................................................................................... 4-26
MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset Time Period .............................................................................................. 4-27
MCA Rectifier Sequencing Feature ............................................................................................................... 4-27
Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize Feature ............................................................................................ 4-27
Automatic Test/Equalize Feature ................................................................................................................... 4-27
MCA Power Share Feature ............................................................................................................................ 4-27
Alarm Relay Test Feature .............................................................................................................................. 4-27
MCA “Alternate Current Limit” Feature .......................................................................................................... 4-27
CHAPTER 5 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE ................................................................................ 5-1
Admonishments ............................................................................................................................................... 5-2
General Safety ........................................................................................................................................... 5-2
Voltages ..................................................................................................................................................... 5-2
LMS Maintenance Procedures ......................................................................................................................... 5-2
System Maintenance Procedures .................................................................................................................... 5-3
Adding a Rectifier ............................................................................................................................................. 5-8
Table of Contents Page iii
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
CHAPTER 6 SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR ............................................... 6-1
Contact Information .......................................................................................................................................... 6-1
Admonishments ............................................................................................................................................... 6-2
General Safety ........................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Voltages ..................................................................................................................................................... 6-2
Circuit Card Handling ................................................................................................................................ 6-3
LMS Troubleshooting Procedures ................................................................................................................... 6-3
Troubleshooting Information ............................................................................................................................ 6-4
General ...................................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Adjustments ............................................................................................................................................... 6-4
MCA Messages ......................................................................................................................................... 6-4
Rectifier Current Sharing Unbalance ......................................................................................................... 6-5
Rectifier Module Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting............................................................................ 6-6
Updating the Inventory after Changes to the System Have Been Made .................................................. 6-7
Replacement Information ................................................................................................................................. 6-8
Replacement Assemblies .......................................................................................................................... 6-8
Replacement Cables ................................................................................................................................. 6-8
Replacement Procedures ................................................................................................................................. 6-9
Rectifier Replacement ............................................................................................................................... 6-9
MCA Circuit Card Replacement .............................................................................................................. 6-11
Router Circuit Card Replacement............................................................................................................ 6-15
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement ........................................................................... 6-18
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Replacement ......................................................................... 6-21
MCA I/O Circuit Card Replacement ......................................................................................................... 6-21
Alarm, Reference, and Control Fuse Replacement ................................................................................. 6-22
Rectifier Fan Replacement ...................................................................................................................... 6-25
Adding a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe to a Previously Operated System ...... 6-26
Removing a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe from a Previously Operated
System ........................................................................................................................................................... 6-27
REVISION RECORD
Page iv Table of Contents
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CHAPTER 1
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Detail C - Monitoring and Control Section (Distribution Only Bays) ....................... 1-11
Detail D - Front Door (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays)
Detail E - MCA Circuit Card (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only
Bays) and Router Circuit Card (Secondary Power/Distribution and Power
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
PREFACE
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
This document (Section 5877) provides User Instructions for NetSure ™ Power System
Model 802 NLDB (208V Input Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays), 802 NLEB (480V
Input Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays) and 802 NL B (Distribution Only Bay);
Spec. No. 582140000.
For an Installation Guide, refer to Section 5957 located in the separate INSTALLATION
MANUAL. This is a condensed version of the Installation Instructions (Section 5876).
Section 5876 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Refer to SAG582140000 (System Application Guide) for additional information. The SAG can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
For a color MCA Menu Tree, refer to Section 5886. Section 5886 is provided in the separate INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided on the CD).
Your power system may contain an optional LMS Monitoring System, refer to Section
5879 (LMS1000 Installation Instructions) and Section 5847 (LMS1000 User Instructions) provided on the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Page 1-2 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
-48V DC @ up to 10,000 amperes power system.
This power system is designed to power a load while charging a positive grounded battery. This power system is capable of operating in a batteryless installation or off battery for maintenance purposes. This power system is designed for operation with the positive output grounded.
The NetSure™ 802
NLDB (208V Input Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays), 802 NLEB
(480V Input Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays), and 802 NL B (Distribution Only
Bay) DC Power System is a complete integrated power system containing rectifiers, intelligent control, metering, monitoring, and distribution. This power system consists of the following components.
Power/Distribution Bays
The system consists of one (1) Primary Power/Distribution Bay and up to nine (9)
Secondary Power/Distribution Bays.
Each Power/Distribution Bay can be equipped with up to ten (10) rectifiers and provides distribution. Distribution is divided into two buses which accept a choice of fuse and circuit breaker types and sizes.
Each Power/Distribution Bay contains a Monitor and Control Panel. In the Primary
Power/Distribution Bay, this panel houses the Meter-Control-Alarm (MCA) assembly.
This panel in the Primary Power/Distribution Bay also houses the optional LMS Main
CPU circuit card of the integrated LMS Monitoring System. In a Secondary
Power/Distribution Bay, this panel can be equipped with an optional LMS Expansion
CPU circuit card. (The optional LMS Monitoring System provides a higher level of monitoring and controlling capabilities to the power system.)
The Monitor and Control Panel in both Primary and Secondary Power/Distribution
Bays contain a seven-slot card cage to house MCA alarm relay circuit cards, MCA input/output (I/O) circuit cards, and optional LMS I/O circuit cards. (If a Secondary
Power/Distribution Bay is to be equipped with optional LMS I/O circuit cards, it must also be equipped with an LMS Expansion CPU circuit card.)
Power Only Bays
The system can consist of one (1) Primary Power Only Bay and up to nine (9)
Secondary Power Only Bays.
Each Power Only Bay can be equipped with up to ten (10) Rectifiers.
Each Power Only Bay contains a Monitor and Control Panel. In the Primary Power
Only Bay, this panel houses the Meter-Control-Alarm (MCA) assembly. This panel in the Primary Power Only Bay also houses the optional LMS Main CPU circuit card of the integrated LMS Monitoring System. In a Secondary Power Only Bay, this panel can be equipped with an optional LMS Expansion CPU circuit card. (The optional
LMS Monitoring System provides a higher level of monitoring and controlling capabilities to the power system.)
The Monitor and Control Panel in both Primary and Secondary Power Only Bays contain a seven-slot card cage to house MCA alarm relay circuit cards, MCA input/output (I/O) circuit cards, and optional LMS I/O circuit cards. (If a Secondary
Power Only Bay is to be equipped with optional LMS I/O circuit cards, it must also be equipped with an LMS Expansion CPU circuit card.)
Distribution Only Bays
The system consists of one (1) to eight (8) Distribution Only Bays.
Each Distribution Only Bay provides four (4) distribution buses.
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL
Each distribution bus accepts a choice of 218-type circuit breakers and TPL-type fuses.
B )
A Distribution Only Bay may also be equipped with an optional distribution panel which accepts a choice of TPS/TLS-type fuseholders or Bullet Nose-type circuit breakers.
Rectifiers
The rectifiers provide load power, battery float current, and battery recharge current during normal operating conditions.
MCA (Meter-Control-Alarm)
The MCA controls the operation of the rectifiers and provides power system control, metering, monitoring, and alarm functions.
MCA Local Control Panel: This panel is located on the front of the Primary
Power/Distribution Bay or Power Only Bay and contains a keypad, display, and indicators for local MCA User interface.
MCA Relay Circuit Card: Each MCA relay circuit card provides six (6) sets of
Form-C relay contacts for customer external alarms. These relays are User programmable for various power system alarms. Up to sixteen (16) MCA relay circuit cards can be installed in the Primary and Secondary Power/Distribution and Power
Only Bays. The Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays are factory equipped with two (2) MCA relay circuit cards.
MCA I/O Circuit Cards: The MCA I/O circuit cards provide analog inputs/outputs and binary inputs. Up to sixteen (16) MCA I/O circuit cards can be installed in the
Primary and Secondary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays.
Optional Integrated LMS Monitoring System
The LMS Monitoring System consists of an LMS Main CPU circuit card, optional LMS
Expansion CPU circuit cards, optional LMS I/O circuit cards, optional LMS Expansion
Cabinet, and optional LMS Expansion Assemblies.
The LMS Main CPU circuit card is mounted in the Primary Power/Distribution and
Power Only Bays. Each Secondary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bay that is to be equipped with optional LMS I/O circuit cards must contain an LMS Expansion
CPU circuit card. LMS Expansion Cabinets and LMS Expansion Assemblies are available that mount into customer equipment.
The LMS Monitoring System is factory integrated within each Power/Distribution,
Power Only, and Distribution Only Bay and requires no additional customer interconnections within the bays. Simple cable connections between the
Power/Distribution, Power Only, and Distribution Only Bays complete the interbay connections required. Separate analog, binary, and relay circuit cards do not have to be supplied for power system monitoring. Analog, binary, relay, and temperature circuit cards can be provided to monitor equipment external to the power system.
The LMS input circuit cards monitor a variety of analog, binary, and temperature points external to the system. An LMS relay output circuit card is also available which provides programmable relays. These relays may be used for external alarms, or to control other equipment.
The LMS Monitoring System can be accessed via a local port, a modem port (when optional modem is ordered), an optional TL1 port, and an Ethernet port (for Telnet access, optional Web access, optional SNMP access, optional TL1 access, and
Email alarm reporting).
The LMS Monitoring System collects data from the power system and the input circuit cards monitoring external points. The data collected is used for alarm processing and reporting, and to provide statistics.
Page 1-4 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
The LMS Monitoring System is capable of reporting alarm conditions to a remote terminal, pager, Email address, via SNMP traps over Ethernet when the SNMP option is ordered, or via TL1 (over Ethernet) when the 'TL1 over Ethernet' option is ordered. TL1 is also available via a serial connection in 'direct mode'. For remote terminal or pager notification, the LMS Main CPU circuit card must be equipped with the optional modem. Two types of alarm reporting mechanisms are provided,
System Alarm Reporting and Individual User Alarm Reporting.
Refer to SAG586505000 for further LMS information. The SAG can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Applications
The NetSure ™ 802
NLDB and 802 NLEB is capable of interfacing with Vortex
®
Power
Systems (VPS).
The NetSure ™ 802
NLDB and 802 NLEB is capable of interfacing with legacy power systems.
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
SYSTEM OVERVIEW ILLUSTRATIONS
Power/Distribution Bay
Bay LED (Located on outside of front door)
Green = OK
Red = Bay Failure
Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA
Distribution Bus LED
Green = OK
Red = Distribution Bus Failure
Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA
Distribution
Bus #1
Spare
Fuseholders
(behind hinged panel)
Monitoring
Bus #1 Monitoring Circuit Card (See Detail A)
(behind hinged panel)
Distribution
Bus #2
Spare
Fuseholders
(behind hinged panel)
Monitoring
Bus #2 Monitoring Circuit Card (See Detail A)
(behind hinged panel)
System Monitoring and Control
See Detail B
(See Detail D for Front Door Illustration of MCA Control Panel)
Power
PCUs
(See Detail J)
Front Door Removed in
Illustration for Clarity
Note
Each MCA component (i.e. PCU, Bus Monitoring
Circuit Card, Bay Router Circuit Card, MCA Relay
Circuit Card) can be programmed with a custom text message for identification purposes.
25 Function Channels Provided
Program each to alarm for selected conditions, then program customer alarm relays (if furnished) to activate if a specific function channel alarms.
Page 1-6 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Power Only Bay
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Bay LED (Located on outside of front door)
Green = OK
Red = Bay Failure
Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA
System Monitoring and Control
See Detail B
(See Detail D for Front Door Illustration of MCA Control Panel)
Front Door Removed in
Illustration for Clarity
Power
PCUs
(See Detail J)
Note
Each MCA component (i.e. PCU, Bus Monitoring
Circuit Card, Bay Router Circuit Card, MCA Relay
Circuit Card) can be programmed with a custom text message for identification purposes.
25 Function Channels Provided
Program each to alarm for selected conditions, then program customer alarm relays (if furnished) to activate if a specific function channel alarms.
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Distribution Only Bay
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Opt ional List C
Bullet Nose
Device Panel
(not to scale)
Bay LED
Green = OK
Red = Bay Failure
Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA
Distribution Bus LED
Green = OK
Red = Distribution Bus Failure
Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA
D istribution
Bus #1
Monitoring
Bus #1 Monitoring
Circuit Card
(See Det ail A)*
(behind hinged panel)
Di stribution
Bus #2
Monitoring
Bus #2 Monitoring
Circuit Card
(See Detail A)*
(behind hinged panel)
Monitoring and Control Section
See Detail C
Distribution
Bus #3
Monitoring
Bus #3 Monitoring
Circui t Card
(See Detail A)*
(behind hinged panel)
* Spare Fuseholders are located behind hinged panel
Distribution
Bus #4
Monitoring
Bus #4 Monitoring
Circuit Card
(See Detail A)*
(behi nd hinged panel)
Front Door Removed in
Illustration for Clarity
Front View
Distribution Bay
Page 1-8 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Detail A - Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Identification
Indicator
Green = OK
Red = Failure
Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA
DISTRIBUTION BUS MONITORING CIRCUIT CARD
(P/N 524982)
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-9
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Detail B - System Monitoring and Control Section
MCA Network
Connector
(for Left Expansion)
MCA Network
Connector
(for Right Expansion)
MCA Temp. Comp.
Probe Connector
(Primary Bay Only)
External
CAN BUS
Port
LMS Ethernet
Port (Primary
Bay Only)
Power and FA
Indicators
MCA*
(Primary Bay) or
Router
(Secondary
Bay)
Circuit Card
(See Detail E)
Seven-Slot Card Cage for MCA Customer Alarm
Relay circuit cards, optional MCA I/O circuit cards, and/or optional LMS Input/Output I/O circuit cards.
Note: MCA circuit cards can be installed in any position. LMS I/O circuit cards MUST be populated left to right.
(See Detail H and I)
LMS
OEM Port
(RS-485)
(Primary Bay
Only)
LMS
Network
Ports
(Echelon)
Optional LMS Monitoring System
Main CPU Circuit Card** (Primary Bay) or Expansion CPU Circuit Card
(Secondary Bays)
(See Detail F)
* Note: MCA Circuit Card contains external reference and control terminal block.
Input Power Fuses
MCA/Router Circuit Card
**Note: LMS Main CPU Circuit Card, when equipped with the
Modem Circuit Card, contains the Modem Port.
LMS Main/Expansion CPU Circuit Card
Distribution Row #1 and #2 Monitoring Circuit Cards
SYSTEM MONITORING AND CONTROL SECTION
POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND POWER ONLY BAYS
Page 1-10 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Detail C - Monitoring and Control Section (Distribution Only Bays)
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-11
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Detail D - Front Door
(Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays)
MCA Control Panel and Display
Alarm
Cutoff
Indicator
(Yellow)
Audible
Alarm
MAJOR
Indicator
(Flashes
Red)
MINOR
Indicator
(Red)
AC
Indicator
(Green - OK
Red - Fail)
TESTEQ
Indicator
(Yellow)
FUNCTION SET
YES / + / i
Pushbutton Switch
ENTER / /
Pushbutton Switch
NO / -
Pushbutton Switch
ALARM
CUTOFF
Pushbutton
Switch
LMS LOCAL PORT
(USB)
(active only if optional LMS installed)
(Provided via a USB Type B to RS-232 Port Adapter Unit)
FUNCTION
SELECT
Up / Down
Pushbutton
Switches
FRONT DOOR
(PRIMARY POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND POWER ONLY BAYS)
MCA CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY
5 1
9 6
Mating Connector in Power System Wire Harness
(9-Pin Female D-Type Jack)
If required to connect to a serial port, disconnect the factory plug to the
“USB to RS-232 Port Adapter
Unit
” and connect to this plug.
Page 1-12 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Detail E - MCA Circuit Card (Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only
Bays) and Router Circuit Card (Secondary Power/Distribution and Power
Only Bays and Distribution Only Bays)
* Automatic internal sense when not connected.
Note: If connected and removed, external
A/D Volt Alarm activates. Clear alarm by updating inventory.
*** Green = OK
Red = Failure
Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA
** Apply test contact closure, then apply
HVS or ESTOP closure to test these circuits.
See MCA display to verify circuits operational.
Dry Relay Contact
Closure to Activate
External
Voltage Input
(for MCA Alarms and Meter Reading*)
-VSense +VSense
MCA Network Connector
(for Left Expansion)
Remote
Equalize
Remote
HVS
Test
Input**
PCU
Emergency
Stop (ESTOP)
MCA Network Connector
(for Right Expansion)
RJ-45
Jack
RJ-45
Jack
1
MCA Network Connector
(for Left Expansion)
RJ-45
Jack
10
Identification
Indicator***
MCA
(PRIMARY POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND
POWER ONLY BAYS) (P/N 509478)
MCA Network Connector
(for Right Expansion)
RJ-45
Jack
Identification
Indicator***
ROUTER
(SECONDARY POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND
POWER ONLY BAYS AND DISTRIBUTION
ONLY BAYS) (P/N 509509)
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-13
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Detail F
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Piggy-Back Modem
Circuit Card
(P/N 508951)
Main LMS CPU
Circuit Card
(P/N 545558)
Expansion LMS CPU
Circuit Card
(P/N 506153)
Page 1-14 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Details G - MCA I/O Circuit Cards
Detail G1 - MCA Relay Circuit Card (P/N 514348)
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Identification
Indicator
Green = OK
Red = Failure
Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA
K3
NC
COM
NO
K2
NC
COM
NO
K1
NC
COM
NO
12
18 9 NC
COM
NO
K6
NC
COM
NO
K5
NC
COM
NO
K4
10
TB1
1
MCA RELAY CIRCUIT CARD
(P/N 514348)
Details G2 - MCA Analog/Binary Circuit Card P/N 524550
Identification
Indicator
Green = OK
Red = Failure
Yellow (Flashing) = Communicating with MCA
_
+
_
+
A1 OUT**
A1 IN*
B4***
* 0-50 mv DC Shunt Input
** 0-50 mv DC Output for Remote Plant Output Current Monitoring
*** Dry Contacts, Circuit Closure to Activate Alarm
B3***
B2***
B1***
MCA I/O CIRCUIT CARDS
(P/N 524550, 1 analog input, 1 analog output, 4 binary inputs)
1
TB1
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-15
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Detail H - LMS I/O Circuit Cards
Page 1-16 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Detail I1 - LMS 4 Input Analog Circuit Card (P/N 506336)
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
TB1
506336
3
2
1
6
5
8
7
4
11
10
9
16
15
14
13
12
A4
LARGE SIGNAL
(0-60 volts DC)
A4
A3
SMALL SIGNAL
(50 mv shunts, 100 mv shunts,
20 ma current loops)
LARGE SIGNAL
(0-60 volts DC)
A3
SMALL SIGNAL
(50 mv shunts, 100 mv shunts,
20 ma current loops)
A2
LARGE SIGNAL
(0-60 volts DC)
A2
SMALL SIGNAL
(50 mv shunts, 100 mv shunts,
20 ma current loops)
A1
LARGE SIGNAL
(0-60 volts DC)
A1
SMALL SIGNAL
(50 mv shunts, 100 mv shunts,
20 ma current loops)
Analog input wiring connection terminals
Note:
Analog input designations A1 through A4 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual analog channel number depends upon the quantity of analog and temperature circuit cards installed and location of this analog circuit card in the system network.
LMS 4-INPUT ANALOG
CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506336)
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-17
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Detail I2 - LMS 8 Input Analog Circuit Card (P/N 514528)
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
TB1
514528
7
6
9
8
5
2
1
4
3
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
50 mv Shunts Only
50 mv Shunts Only
50 mv Shunts Only
50 mv Shunts Only
50 mv Shunts Only
50 mv Shunts Only
50 mv Shunts Only
50 mv Shunts Only
Analog input wiring connection terminals
Note:
Analog input designations A1 through A8 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual analog channel number depends upon the quantity of analog and temperature circuit cards installed and location of this analog circuit card in the system network.
LMS 8-INPUT ANALOG
CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 514528)
Page 1-18 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Detail I3 - LMS 8 Input Temperature Circuit Card (P/N 506333)
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
TB1
506333
6
5
8
7
4
10
9
3
2
1
16
15
14
13
12
11
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
Temperature input wiring connection terminals
GREEN WIRE TO CABINET GROUND
Note:
Analog input designations A1 through A8 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual analog channel number depends upon the quantity of analog and temperature circuit cards installed and location of this temperature circuit card in the system network.
LMS 8-INPUT TEMPERATURE
CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506333)
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-19
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Detail I4 - LMS 4 Input Binary Circuit Card (P/N 506332)
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
TB1
506332
16
15
14
13
12
11
8
7
6
5
10
9
4
3
2
1
B4
B3
B2
B1
Binary input wiring connection terminals
Note:
Binary input designations B1 through B4 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual binary channel number depends upon the quantity of binary circuit cards installed and the location of this binary circuit card in the system network.
LMS 4-INPUT BINARY
CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506332)
Page 1-20 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Detail I5 - LMS 8 Input Binary Circuit Card (P/N 506334)
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
+BAT
-BAT
TB1
506334
16
15
14
13
12
11
10
4
3
6
5
2
1
9
8
7
B4
B3
B2
B1
B8
B7
B6
B5
Connections to Battery, as required
Note:
Needed only to complete binary input path as determined by placement of appropriate jumper. If all binary inputs require the same battery potential, only that potential needs to be connected.
Binary input wiring connection terminals
Note:
Binary input designations B1 through B8 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual binary channel number depends upon the quantity of binary circuit cards installed and the location of this binary circuit card in the system network.
LMS 8-INPUT BINARY
CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506334)
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-21
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Detail I6 - LMS 4 Output Relay Circuit Card (P/N 506335)
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
TB1
506335
4
3
6
5
2
1
8
7
10
9
16
15
14
13
12
11
NC
C K4
NO
NC
C
NO
K3
Relay output wiring connection terminals
NC
C K2
NO
NC
C K1
NO
Note:
Relay designations K1 through K4 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual relay channel number depends upon the number of relay circuit cards installed and the location of this relay circuit card in the system network.
Relay contacts are shown with the relays deenergized.
LMS 4-OUTPUT RELAY
CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 506335)
Page 1-22 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Detail I7 - LMS 12 Input Analog Circuit Card (P/N 520838)
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
TB1
520838
4
3
6
5
2
1
8
7
10
9
16
15
14
13
12
11 unused unused unused
+ Terminal Battery Cell 12
+ Terminal Battery Cell 11
+ Terminal Battery Cell 10
+ Terminal Battery Cell 9
+ Terminal Battery Cell 8
+ Terminal Battery Cell 7
+ Terminal Battery Cell 6
+ Terminal Battery Cell 5
+ Terminal Battery Cell 4
+ Terminal Battery Cell 3
+ Terminal Battery Cell 2
+ Terminal Battery Cell 1
-- Terminal Battery Cell 11
(A12)
(A11)
(A10)
(A9)
(A8)
(A7)
(A6)
(A5)
(A4)
(A3)
(A2)
(A1)
Analog input wiring connection terminals
Note:
Analog input designations A1 through A12 as shown are for the circuit card only. The actual analog channel number depends upon the quantity of analog and temperature circuit cards installed and location of this analog circuit card in the system network.
LMS 12-INPUT ANALOG
CIRCUIT CARD (P/N 520838)
Chapter 1. System Overview Page 1-23
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Detail J - Rectifier
208V and 480V Rectifier
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Operate / Standby Switch
Operate
Standby
Output
Current
Bargraph
AC / Identify Indicator
Protection Alarm Indicator
Fail Alarm Indicator
Page 1-24 Chapter 1. System Overview
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CHAPTER 2
NAVIGATING THE MCA
MCA LOCAL CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY
Located on the Primary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays ’ front door.
Alarm
Cutoff
Indicator
(Yellow)
Audible
Alarm
MAJOR
Indicator
(Flashes
Red)
MINOR
Indicator
(Red)
AC
Indicator
(Green - OK
Red - Fail)
TESTEQ
Indicator
(Yellow)
FUNCTION SET
YES / + / i
Pushbutton Switch
ENTER / /
Pushbutton Switch
NO / -
Pushbutton Switch
ALARM
CUTOFF
Pushbutton
Switch
LMS LOCAL PORT
(USB)
(active only if optional LMS installed)
(Provided via a USB Type B to RS-232 Port Adapter Unit)
FUNCTION
SELECT
Up / Down
Pushbutton
Switches
5 1
9 6
Mating Connector in Power System Wire Harness
(9-Pin Female D-Type Jack)
FRONT DOOR
(PRIMARY POWER/DISTRIBUTION AND POWER ONLY BAYS)
MCA CONTROL PANEL AND DISPLAY
If required to connect to a serial port, disconnect the factory plug to the “USB to RS-232 Port Adapter
Unit ” and connect to this plug.
Navigating the MCA is an easy process. You just have to remember a few key combinations (as shown in the following chart). The symbols that appear at the end of the fourth line of the display indicate which keypad buttons can be pressed at any given time.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
TASK
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Getting to Home Position
Moving from One Menu to Another Menu
Moving Within a Menu
Changing a Value or Setting
Entering the
Adjustment/Change
Setting Mode
Changing the
Value or Setting
Locking the Change
Confirming the Change
Changing a Control Function
Entering the
Adjustment/Change
Setting Mode
Confirming the Change
KEY OR KEY COMBINATIONS
YES / + / i and NO / -
YES / + / i
NOTES
At any level in the MCA menus, pressing YES / + / i and NO / - simultaneously takes you back to the beginning of the MCA menu tree. NO / -
ENTER
ENTER / /
You can travel left to right from one menu to another by pressing ENTER.
You can also go back to a specified menu by pressing ENTER while the menu's name is being displayed.
UP ARROW, DOWN ARROW
FUNCTION
SELECT
Up
Down
Press UP ARROW to move up the list of available entries in the active menu.
Press DOWN ARROW to move down the list of available entries in the active menu.
ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF
ALARM
CUTOFF
ENTER / /
YES / + / i and NO / -
NO / -
ENTER
YES / + / i
ENTER / /
YES / + / i and NO / -
YES / + / i
Changing a value or setting requires four (4) steps.
1. With the current value or setting being displayed, simultaneously press ENTER and ALARM
CUTOFF.
2. To increase the value or change the setting, press YES / + / i. To decrease the value or change the setting, press NO / -.
3. With the correct value or setting being displayed, press ENTER.
4. To accept the change, at the
"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press
YES / + / i. To reject the change, at the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press NO / -.
NO / -
ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF
ALARM
CUTOFF
ENTER / /
YES / + / i and NO / -
YES / + / i
NO / -
Changing a control function requires two (2) steps.
1. With the control function menu item being displayed, simultaneously press ENTER and
ALARM CUTOFF.
2. To accept the change, at the
"ARE YOU SURE?" prompt press the YES / + / i. To reject the change, at the "ARE YOU
SURE?" prompt press NO / -.
)
Page 2-2 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA NUMBERING SCHEME
The MCA identifies (numbers) the components of the system as follows.
MCA IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
COMPONENT
MCA NUMBERING
SCHEME (note that each line shown below is separated with a dash in the MCA display)
NOTES EXAMPLE
MCA/Router
Rectifier
(PCU)
MCA Relay
Circuit Card
Bay #
Bay #
Card Position # w/in Bay
Relay # w/in Card
Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.
Bay #
MCA Rectifier # within the Bay / # of
Rectifiers Installed in System
Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.
Rectifiers are identified from 1 to 10, as they are powered-up and recognized by the MCA.
Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.
Card #1 = left slot,
Card #7 = right slot.
Relay # (see illustration in System Overview
Chapter)
Primary Bay
1
Second Bay
2
Fifth Bay
5
Primary Bay, First
Recognized Rectifier
(w/ 36 rectifiers installed)
1-01/36
Second Bay, Third
Recognized Rectifier
(w/ 24 rectifiers installed)
2-03/24
Fifth Bay, Tenth
Recognized Rectifier
(w/ 12 rectifiers installed)
5-10/12
Primary Bay, Relay
Card in First Slot,
Relay One on Card
1-1-1
Second Bay, Relay
Card in Third Slot,
Relay Four on Card
2-3-4
Fifth Bay, Relay Card in Seventh Slot, Relay
Six on Card
5-7-6
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
COMPONENT
MCA NUMBERING
SCHEME (note that each line shown below is separated with a dash in the MCA display)
NOTES EXAMPLE
MCA I/O
Circuit Card
Distribution
Bus (Power/
Distribution
Bays)
Distribution
Device
(Power/
Distribution
Bays)
Bay #
Card Position # w/in Bay
Bay #
Distribution Bus # w/in Bay (A or B
Designation)
Type
Bay #
Distribution Point # w/in Bay
Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.
Card #1 = left slot,
Card #7 = right slot.
Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.
Distribution Bus #1 = Top,
Distribution Bus #2 = Bottom.
A or B as set by jumper on MCA Distribution
Bus Monitoring Circuit Card.
Type = Breaker, Fuse, or Plug-In.
Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.
Distribution Point =
1-24 (left - right, Top Bus, Bus #1).
25-36 (left - right, Bottom Bus, Bus #2).
Note that distribution components may take more than one mounting position, designation number is the left most mounting position.
Primary Bay, I/O Card in First Slot
1-1
Second Bay, I/O Card in Third Slot
2-3
Fifth Bay, I/O Card in
Seventh Slot
5-7
Primary Bay, Top Bus,
Set for A Designation
1-1A
Second Bay, Bottom
Bus, Set for B
Designation
2-2B
Fifth Bay, Top Bus,
Designation Not Set
5-1
Primary Bay, Circuit
Breaker Mounted in
Position One, Bus 1
Set for A Designation
Breaker 1-01A
Second Bay, Fuse
Mounted in Position
Sixteen, Bus 1
Designation Not Set
Fuse 2-16
Fifth Bay, Plug-In
Mounted in Position
Twenty-Six, Bus 2 Set for B Designation
Plug-In 5-26B
Page 2-4 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
COMPONENT
MCA NUMBERING
SCHEME (note that each line shown below is separated with a dash in the MCA display)
NOTES
Distribution
Only Bay’s
Distribution
Bus
Distribution
Only Bay’s
Distribution
Device
Bay #
Distribution Bus # w/in Bay (A or B
Designation)
Type
Bay #
Distribution Point # w/in Bay
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
EXAMPLE
Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.
Distribution Bus #1 = Top Left,
Distribution Bus #2 = Top Right,
Distribution Bus #3 = Bottom Left,
Distribution Bus #4 = Bottom Right,
A or B as set by jumper on MCA Distribution
Bus Monitoring Circuit Card.
Fifth Bay, Top Left
Bus, Set for B
Designation
5-1B
Sixth Bay, Top Right
Bus, Set for B
Designation
6-2B
Seventh Bay, Bottom
Left Bus, Set for B
Designation
7-3B
Seventh Bay, Bottom
Right Bus, Designation
Not Set
7-4
Type = Breaker or Fuse or MISC 50-73.
Primary Bay is #1, other bays are numbered consecutively, following the bay-to-bay cabling scheme.
Distribution Point =
1-12 (bottom - top, Top Left Bus, Bus #1).
13-24 (top - bottom, Top Right Bus, Bus #2).
25-36 (bottom - top, Bottom Left Bus, Bus #3).
37-48 (top - bottom, Bottom Right Bus, Bus #4).
Note that distribution components may take more than one mounting position, designation number is the left most mounting position.
Note: The optional bullet-device fuse panel is displayed as MISC 50-73.
Fifth Bay, Circuit
Breaker Mounted in
Position One, Bus 1
Set for A Designation
Breaker 5-01A
Sixth Bay, Fuse
Mounted in Position
Thirteen, Bus 2
Designation Not Set
Fuse 6-13
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
MCA MESSAGES
The following chart provides an explanation of each MCA message appearing on the
MCA Menu Tree (Section 5886). The MCA Menu Tree is located in the separate
INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided on the
CD). Note that each line in the MCA Menu Tree contains a number. This number is referenced in the following chart.
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
Definition
1
2
2A
3
3A
4
4A
5
5A
6
6A
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT ACTIVE
HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
INPUT ACTIVE
ALTERNATE CURRENT
LIMIT ACTIVE
SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS
VERY LOW
ALARM LIMIT vv.vvV
NOW AT vv.vvV
SYSTEM BATTERY IS ON
DISCHARGE
ALARM LIMIT vv.vvV
NOW AT vv.vvV
SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE
#1 ALARM
ALARM LIMIT vv.vvV
NOW AT vv.vvV
SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE
#2 ALARM
ALARM LIMIT vv.vvV
NOW AT vv.vvV
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Rectifier Module (PCU) emergency shutdown or fire alarm disconnect signal applied to the system.
High voltage shutdown signal applied to the system.
Indicates that all rectifier modules (PCUs) are operating in the “Alternate Current Limit” mode.
Rectifier output current will be limited to the percent of capacity specified by the “Alternate
Current Limit Capacity” parameter setting.
System voltage below a preset adjustable value, indicating that the battery has been continuously supplying the load and has discharged to approximately half its reserve time.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
System voltage below a preset adjustable value, indicating that the battery is supplying the load and is discharging.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
System voltage above a preset adjustable value.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
System voltage above a preset adjustable value.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
Page 2-6 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1 SYSTEM BREAKER OR
FUSE ALARM
or
### SYSTEM BREAKER &
FUSE ALARMS
F/CB/PI B#-P#A/B
IS OPEN
GO TO MAIN ALARM
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
AC POWER IS OFF TO
ALL PCUs
1 PCU
HAS FAILED
or
### PCUs
HAVE FAILED
or
NO PCUs ARE
IN INVENTORY
PCU B#-ID#/N#
FAILURE
### REMOTE PCUS
HAVE FAILED
1 REMOTE PCU
HAS FAILED
GO TO MAIN ALARM
MENU
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Main
Alarm Menu
Fuse
Alarm Menu
One or more system fuses or circuit breakers open. (### = number of open system fuses or circuit breakers.)
Press ENTER to view which fuse(s) or circuit breaker(s) is open.
Note that the individual fuses and circuit breakers in the bullet nose-type device holders
(plug-in) are not counted. If any number within a bullet nose-type device holder (plug-in) are open, only one will be counted.
Identification of open system fuse or circuit breaker. (F/CB/PI B#-P#A/B = Fuse or Circuit
Breaker or PlugIn, Bay Number-Distribution
Device Position Number [Group A or B
Designation if applicable.])
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple distribution devices are open.
Fuse
Alarm Menu
Fuse
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
PCU
Alarm Menu
PCU
Alarm Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
AC input voltage to all Rectifier Modules
(PCUs) below a preset non-adjustable value.
One or more Rectifier Modules (PCUs) failed.
(### = number of failed Rectifier Modules
[PCUs].)
Press ENTER to view which Rectifier Module
(PCU) failed. or
If the MCA does not recognize any Rectifier
Module (PCU), NO PCUs ARE IN INVENTORY is displayed.
Identification of failed Rectifier Module (PCU).
(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module
MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple Rectifier Modules failed.
Press ENTER to view why Rectifier Module failed.
More than one Remote Rectifier (PCU) failed.
(### = number of failed Remote Rectifiers
[PCUs].)
PCU
Alarm Menu
PCU
Alarm Menu
One Remote Rectifier (PCU) failed.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
17
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
18
PCU B#-ID#/N#
EMERG. STOP
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
PCU B#-ID#/N#
H.V. SHUTDOWN
PCU B#-ID#/N#
AC LINE OFF
PCU B#-ID#/N#
AC LINE LOW
PCU B#-ID#/N#
AC LINE HIGH
PCU B#-ID#/N#
AC PHASE LOST
PCU B#-ID#/N#
POWER FACTOR
PCU B#-ID#/N#
DC/DC CONV.
PCU B#-ID#/N#
FUSE/BREAKER
PCU B#-ID#/N#
INHIBITED
PCU B#-ID#/N#
ON STANDBY
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
PCU
Alarm Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Rectifier Module (PCU) is in Emergency Stop
Mode. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier
Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module (PCU) is in High Voltage
Shutdown. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier
Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
No AC Input to Rectifier Module (PCU) or
Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) processor failed.
(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module
MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) Low AC Line Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier
Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) High AC Line Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier
Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) AC Line Phase Lost
Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-
Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of
Rectifier Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) internal power factor circuit failed. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-
Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of
Rectifier Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) internal DC/DC converter circuit failed. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay
Number-Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in
Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) DC output fuse open. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier
Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) output inhibited.
(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module
MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module's ( PCU’s) Standby/Operate switch is in the "standby" position. (B#-ID#/N#
= Bay Number-Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in
Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in System.)
Page 2-8 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
PCU B#-ID#/N#
THERMAL LIMIT
PCU B#-ID#/N#
THERMAL STOP
PCU B#-ID#/N#
HIGH AMBIENT
PCU B#-ID#/N#
LOAD SHARE
PCU B#-ID#/N#
1 FAN SPEED
PCU B#-ID#/N#
2+ FANS SPEED
PCU B#-ID#/N#
NO VOLT SENSE
PCU B#-ID#/N#
DUPLICATED
PCU B#-ID#/N#
NO RESPONSE
GO TO PCU ALARM MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
1 DIST. PANEL
HAS FAILED
or
## DIST. PANELS
HAVE FAILED
or
NO DIST. PANELS ARE
IN INVENTORY
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
Rectifier Module (PCU) in Thermal Current
Limit. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier
Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module (PCU) in Thermal Shutdown.
(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module
MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
Rectifier Module's (PCU’s) High Temperature
Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-
Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of
Rectifier Modules in System.)
Load is not balanced with the other Rectifier
Modules (PCUs). (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-
Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of
Rectifier Modules in System.)
1 Rectifier Module (PCU) Fan Fail Alarm active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier
Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
2 or more Rectifier Module (PCU) Fan Fail
Alarms active. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-
Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of
Rectifier Modules in System.)
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
Not used at this time.
Duplicated Reference Designations.
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
MCA communications with Rectifier Module
(PCU) lost. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier
Module MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System.)
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
PCU Alarm
Detail Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
One or more Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit
Cards failed. (## = number of failed
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards.)
Press ENTER to view which Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card(s) failed. or
If the MCA does not recognize any Distribution
Bus Monitoring Circuit Card, NO DIST.
PANELS ARE IN INVENTORY is displayed.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-9
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Message Displayed
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
FAILURE
GO TO MAIN ALARM
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
DISCONNECTED
or
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
RECONNECT?
POSITION B#-P#A/B
NOT FOUND
or
POSITION NOT FOUND
PANEL B#-P#A/B
POSITION B#-P#A/B
TYPE UNKNOWN
F/CB/PI B#-P#A/B
OVER CURRENT
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
LVD FAILURE
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
A/B CHANGED
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
Distribution
Alarm Menu
Identification of failed Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card. (B#-P# A/B = Bay
Number-Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit
Card Position Number [Group A or B
Designation if applicable.])
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit
Cards failed.
Press ENTER to view why Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card failed.
Distribution
Alarm Menu
Distribution
Alarm Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
Not utilized at this time.
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
MCA cannot find a distribution device.
(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Device
Position Number [Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number
[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple distribution devices not found.
MCA cannot identify the distribution device.
(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Device
Position Number [Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple distribution devices not identified.
Distribution device current is above the shunt's rating. (F/CB/PI B#-P#A/B = Fuse or Circuit
Breaker or PlugIn, Bay Number-Distribution
Device Position Number [Group A or B
Designation if applicable.])
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple shunts are over-ranged.
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
Not utilized at this time.
Group A / Group B jumper setting on
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card changed. (B#-P# = Bay Number-Distribution
Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number)
)
Page 2-10 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
PROCESSOR
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B IS
DUPLICATED
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
NO RESPONSE
GO TO DISTRIBUTION
ALARM MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
1 I/O BOARD
HAS FAILED
or
## I/O BOARDS
HAVE FAILED
or
NO I/O BOARD S ARE
IN INVENTORY
I/O BOARD B#-P#
FAILURE
GO TO MAIN ALARM
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card's processor failed. (B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card
Position Number [Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
Duplicated Reference Designations.
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
MCA communications with Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card lost. (B#-P# = Bay
Number-Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit
Card Position Number)
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Main
Alarm Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Menu
One or more MCA I/O Circuit Cards failed. (##
= number of failed MCA I/O Circuit Cards.)
Press ENTER to view which MCA I/O Circuit
Card(s) failed. or
If the MCA does not recognize any MCA I/O
Circuit Card, NO I/O BOARDS ARE IN
INVENTORY is displayed.
Identification of failed MCA I/O Circuit Card.
(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card
Position Number.)
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple MCA I/O Circuit Cards failed.
Press ENTER to view why MCA I/O Circuit
Card failed.
I/O Board
Alarm Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-11
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
Message Displayed
Binary Input Customer
Text Message
I/O BOARD B#-P#
OVER CURRENT
I/O BOARD B#-P#
PROCESSOR
I/O BOARD B#-P# IS
DUPLICATED
I/O BOARD B#-P#
NO RESPONSE
GO TO I/O BOARD
ALARM MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
1 ROUTER
HAS FAILED
or
## ROUTERS
HAVE FAILED
or
NO ROUTERS ARE
IN INVENTORY
ROUTER B#
FAILURE
GO TO MAIN ALARM
MENU
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
I/O Board
Alarm Detail
Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Detail
Menu
Custom test message stored in MCA for binary input that is in alarm state. If multiple inputs in alarm state, scroll through each.
Note: Refer to System Operating Procedures chapter in Section 5877 for procedure how to enter custom test messages. Refer to
Installing the Rectifier Modules and Initially
Starting the Power System chapter in Section
5876 for procedure how to program binary input alarm state (either open or close contact state).
If the current reflected by the analog inputs or outputs gets up to 95% of the shunt rating, the
I/O board activates an over current alarm.
(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card
Position Number.)
I/O Board
Alarm Detail
Menu
MCA I/O Circuit Card's processor failed.
(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card
Position Number.)
I/O Board
Alarm Detail
Menu
Duplicated Reference Designations.
I/O Board
Alarm Detail
Menu
MCA communications with MCA I/O Circuit
Card lost. (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O
Circuit Card Position Number.)
I/O Board
Alarm Detail
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
I/O Board
Alarm Detail
Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Main
Alarm Menu
Router
Alarm Menu
One or more Router Circuit Cards failed. (## = number of failed Router Circuit Cards.)
Press ENTER to view which Router Circuit
Card(s) failed. or
If the MCA does not recognize any Router
Circuit Card, NO ROUTERS ARE IN
INVENTORY is displayed.
Identification of failed Router Circuit Card. (B#
= Bay Number.)
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple Router Circuit Cards failed.
Press ENTER to view why Router Circuit Card failed.
Router
Alarm Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
)
Page 2-12 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
ROUTER B# REMOTE
SENSE OPEN
ROUTER B# INTERNAL
SENSE OPEN
ROUTER B# PROCESSOR
ROUTER B# REPORTS AN
ILLEGAL NODE
ROUTER B# IS
DUPLICATED
ROUTER B#
NO RESPONSE
GO TO ROUTER ALARM
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
1 RELAY BOARD
HAS FAILED
or
## RELAY BOARDS
HAVE FAILED
or
NO RELAY BOARDS ARE
IN INVENTORY
RELAY BOARD B#-P#
FAILURE
GO TO MAIN ALARM
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
RELAY B#-P#-R# IS
STUCK
RELAY BOARD B#-P#
PROCESSOR
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Router
Alarm Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Router Alarm
Detail Menu
Router Circuit Card External A/D Voltage Alarm active. (B# = Bay Number.)
Router Alarm
Detail Menu
Router Circuit Card Internal A/D Voltage Alarm active. (B# = Bay Number.)
Router Alarm
Detail Menu
Router Circuit Card's processor failed. (B# =
Bay Number.)
Router Alarm
Detail Menu
MCA dose not recognize a node's type or identification number. (B# = Bay Number.)
Router Alarm
Detail Menu
Duplicated Reference Designations.
Router Alarm
Detail Menu
MCA communications with Router Circuit Card lost. (B# = Bay Number.)
Router Alarm
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Router Alarm
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Main
Alarm Menu
Relay
Alarm Menu
One or more MCA Customer Alarm Relay
Circuit Cards failed. (## = number of failed
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Cards.)
Press ENTER to view which MCA Customer
Alarm Relay Circuit Card(s) failed. or
If the MCA does not recognize any MCA
Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card, NO
RELAY BOARDS ARE IN INVENTORY is displayed.
Identification of failed MCA Customer Alarm
Relay Circuit Card. (B#-P# = Bay Number-
Relay Circuit Card Position Number.)
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit
Cards failed.
Press ENTER to view why MCA Customer
Alarm Relay Circuit Card failed.
Relay
Alarm Menu
Relay
Alarm Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Relay Alarm
Detail Menu
Relay Alarm
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Relay does not change state. (B#-P#-R# =
Bay Number-Relay Circuit Card Position
Number-Relay Number on Card.)
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card's processor failed. (B#-P# = Bay Number-Relay
Circuit Card Position Number.)
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-13
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
84
RELAY BOARD B#-P# IS
DUPLICATED
85
86
87
RELAY BOARD B#-P#
NO RESPONSE
GO TO RELAY ALARM
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
88
88A
HIGH TEMPERATURE #1
ALARM
ALARM LIMIT ttt°C/F
NOW AT ttt°C/F
89
89A
90
90A
91
HIGH TEMPERATURE #2
ALARM
ALARM LIMIT ttt°C/F
NOW AT ttt°C/F
LOW TEMPERATURE #1
ALARM
ALARM LIMIT ttt°C/F
NOW AT ttt°C/F
LOW TEMPERATURE #2
ALARM
91A
92
93
94
ALARM LIMIT ttt°C/F
NOW AT ttt°C/F
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NO SIGNAL
MAJOR MONITORING
ALARM(S)
or
Monitoring Major
LED Messages
MINOR MONITORING
ALARM(S)
or
Monitoring Minor
LED Messages
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
Relay Alarm
Detail Menu
Duplicated Reference Designations.
Relay Alarm
Detail Menu
MCA communications with MCA Customer
Alarm Relay Circuit Card lost. (B#-P# = Bay
Number-Relay Circuit Card Position Number.)
Relay Alarm
Detail Menu
Relay Alarm
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Battery ambient temperature above preset adjustable value.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
Battery ambient temperature above preset adjustable value.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
Battery ambient temperature below preset adjustable value.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
Battery ambient temperature below preset adjustable value.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
MCA Temperature Sensor signal lost, if
Temperature Sensor installed.
Main
Alarm Menu
Major Alarm conditions detected by LMS1000.
Alarm Messages derived from LMS1000 are displayed by the MCA.
Main
Alarm Menu
Minor Alarm conditions detected by LMS1000.
Alarm Messages derived from LMS1000 are displayed by the MCA.
Page 2-14 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
95
96
97
98
99
99A
100
100A
101
101A
102
103
104
105
MONITORING
INFORMATION
or
Monitoring Info
LED Messages
MONITORING DOES NOT
RESPOND
CONTROLLER FAILURE
####
THE CONTROLLER IS
INITIALIZING
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT
ALARM
ALARM LIMIT aaaaaA
NOW AT aaaaaA
DISTRIBUTION GROUP A
LOAD ALARM
ALARM LIMIT aaaaaA
NOW AT aaaaaA
DISTRIBUTION GROUP B
LOAD ALARM
ALARM LIMIT aaaaaA
NOW AT aaaaaA
THE DISPLAY DOES NOT
RESPOND
GO TO FUNCTION MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
VIEW THE SYSTEM
MEASUREMENTS
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
--
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
Main
Alarm Menu
Function
Menu
MCA communications with LMS1000 lost.
MCA failed (#### = type of memory failure)
The MCA is initializing.
System load current above preset adjustable value (includes distribution loads monitored by the Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards and any MCA I/O Circuit Card set as
"Distribution" [other setting choice is
"Auxiliary"]).
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
Sum of load currents monitored by all
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards set as
Group A designation above preset adjustable value.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
Sum of load currents monitored by all
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards set as
Group B designation above preset adjustable value.
Press ENTER to view the alarm limit setpoint and the current value of the monitored input.
Displays the alarm limit setpoint and the actual value of the monitored input.
MCA communications with MCA Display lost.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Status Messages detected by LMS1000.
Status Messages derived from LMS1000 are
displayed by the MCA.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-15
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
Message Displayed
SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV (REM)
or
SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV (AVG)
ROUTER B# REMOTE
SENSE vv.vvV
ROUTER B# INTERNAL
SENSE vv.vvV
GO TO MEASUREMENT
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
TOTAL SYSTEM
LOAD aaaaaA
TOTAL DISTRIBUTION
LOAD aaaaaA
or
TOTAL AUXILIARY
LOAD aaaaaA
DISTRIBUTION GROUP A
LOAD aaaaaA
DISTRIBUTION GROUP B
LOAD aaaaaA
REMOTE SYSTEM
LOAD aaaaaA
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
The voltage of the external (remote) source connected to the MCA / Router circuit card (for
MCA alarms and meter reading), if connected.
Measurement
Menu or
System output sense voltage (average of all bay's internal sense voltages).
Press ENTER to view individual bay sense voltages.
Router
Voltage
Menu
External (remote) sense voltage applied to the
MCA / Router Circuit Card, if connected. (B# =
Bay Number).
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
Router Circuit Cards' sense voltages.
Router
Voltage
Menu
Internal sense voltage applied to the Router
Circuit Card. (B# = Bay Number).
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
Router Circuit Cards' sense voltages.
Router
Voltage
Menu
Router
Voltage
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Measurement
Menu
Total system load current.
System
Load Menu
System
Load Menu
System
Load Menu
System
Load Menu
Total distribution load current (includes distribution loads monitored by the Distribution
Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards and any MCA I/O
Circuit Card set as "Distribution" [other setting choice is "Auxiliary"]).
Press ENTER to view individual bay distribution load currents. or
Total (sum) load current monitored by MCA I/O
Circuit Cards set as "Auxiliary".
Press ENTER to view individual MCA I/O circuit card load currents.
Total load current monitored by Distribution
Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards set as Group A designation.
Total load current monitored by Distribution
Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards set as Group B designation.
Total Remote Distribution load current reported by the LMS when LMS Function Channel 63 value is greater than zero.
)
Page 2-16 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
116
117
GO TO MEASUREMENT
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
System
Load Menu
System
Load Menu
118
119
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
LOAD aaaaaA
I/O BOARD B#-P#
LOAD aaaaaA
Distribution
Load Menu
Distribution
Load Menu
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Sum of load currents monitored by the
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card.
(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number
[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards' load currents.
Press ENTER to view individual distribution device load currents.
Load current monitored by the first MCA I/O
Circuit Card (set as "Distribution" or "Auxiliary" as determined by what is being displayed on line #112). (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O
Circuit Card Position Number.)
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
MCA I/O Circuit Cards' load currents.
120
121
GO TO SYSTEM LOAD
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
Distribution
Load Menu
Distribution
Load Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
122
F/CB/MISC 50-73 B#-P#A/B
LOAD aaaaaA
Distribution
Load Detail
Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Distribution device identification number and load current. (F/CB/MISC 50-73 B#-P#A/B =
Fuse or Circuit Breaker or Bullet Device, Bay
Number-Distribution Device Position Number
[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
Distribution Devices' load currents.
123
124
GO TO DISTRIBUTION
LOAD MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
Distribution
Load Detail
Menu
Distribution
Load Detail
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-17
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802
Associated with ...
NLDB , 802
Definition
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
TOTAL PCU OUTPUT aaaaaA
or
TOTAL PCU/RECTIFIER aaaaaA
PCU B#-ID#/N# aaaaaA
RECTIFIER OUTPUT aaaaaA
GO TO MEASUREMENT
MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
TEMPERATURE SENSOR ttt C/F
GO TO FUNCTION MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
FLOAT MODE IS ACTIVE
SET TEST/EQ?
or
TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE
SET FLOAT?
or
TEST/EQUALIZE INPUT
IS ACTIVE
or
TURN OFF POWER SHARE
or
TURN OFF ALTERNATE
CURRENT LIMIT
VIEW THE SYSTEM
INVENTORY
Total Rectifier Module (PCU) output current.
Press ENTER to view individual Rectifier
Module load currents. or
Measurement
Menu
Total Rectifier Module and legacy rectifier output current when LMS1000 Function
Channel #64 reported value is greater than zero.
Press ENTER to view individual Rectifier
Module load currents and legacy system current.
PCU
Load Menu
PCU
Load Menu
Rectifier Module (PCU) output current. (B#-
ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module MCA
ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in
System).
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
Rectifier Modules' load currents.
Legacy Rectifier System output current as reported by the LMS1000 Function Channel
#64.
PCU
Load Menu
PCU
Load Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Measurement
Menu
Temperature detected by Temperature Sensor, if installed.
Measurement
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Measurement
Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Function
Menu
Allows you to change the Rectifier Module
(PCU) output voltage mode.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter. or
The user tried to set Float Mode while an external test/equalize input signal was being supplied to the system.
Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power
Share and Alternate Current Limit to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share or
Alternate Current Limit is on. Turn Power
Share or Alternate Current Limit off first then return to this menu.
Function
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
)
Page 2-18 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
135
1 PCU IS
REPORTING
or
### PCUs ARE
REPORTING
or
NO PCUs ARE
INSTALLED
Inventory
Menu
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
PCU B#-ID#/N#
RATED aaaaaA
GO TO INVENTORY MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
B#-ID#/N# ASSY.
####################
B#-ID#/N# SERIAL
####################
B#-ID#/N# BOOT
####################
B#-ID#/N# SW VER
####################
PSC B#-ID# ASSEMBLY
####################
PSC B#-ID# SERIAL #
####################
PSC B#-ID# BOOTCODE
####################
Number of Rectifier Modules (PCUs) in MCA inventory.
Press ENTER to view individual Rectifier
Module inventory information. or
No Rectifier Modules installed.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
PCU
Inventory
Menu
Rectifier Module (PCU) identification number and output current rating. (B#-ID#/N# = Bay
Number-Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in
Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in System).
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
Rectifier Modules.
PCU
Inventory
Menu
PCU
Inventory
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
Rectifier Module (PCU) Assembly Number.
(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module
MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System).
Rectifier Module (PCU) Serial Number. (B#-
ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module MCA
ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in
System).
Rectifier Module (PCU) Bootcode Number.
(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module
MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System).
Rectifier Module (PCU) Software Number.
(B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-Rectifier Module
MCA ID# w/in Bay/Number of Rectifier
Modules in System).
PSC (Primary Side Controller) Assembly
Number. (B#-ID# = Bay Number-PSC Position
Number).
PSC (Primary Side Controller) Serial Number.
(B#-ID# = Bay Number-PSC Position Number).
PSC (Primary Side Controller) Bootcode
Number. (B#-ID# = Bay Number-PSC Position
Number).
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-19
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
146
PSC B#-ID# SOFTWARE
####################
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
GO TO PCU
INVENTORY
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
1 PCU POSITION
IS EMPTY
or
### PCU POSITIONS
ARE EMPTY
or
NO PCU POSITIONS
ARE EMPTY
1 DIST. PANEL IS
REPORTING
or
## DIST. PANELS ARE
REPORTING
or
NO DIST. PANELS ARE
INSTALLED
PANEL B#-P#A/B INCLUDES
1 POINT
or
PANEL B#-P#A/B INCLUDES
## POINTS
GO TO INVENTORY MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802
Associated with ...
Definition
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
PCU
Inventory
Detail Menu
PSC (Primary Side Controller) Software
Number. (B#-ID# = Bay Number-PSC Position
Number).
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Inventory
Menu
NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB
Number of empty Rectifier Module (PCU) mounting positions in the system. and 802 NL B
Inventory
Menu
Distribution
Inventory
Menu
Number of Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit
Cards in MCA inventory.
Press ENTER to view individual Distribution
Bus Monitoring Circuit Card inventory information. or
No Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards installed.
Number of distribution devices this Distribution
Bus Monitoring Circuit Card is monitoring. (B#-
P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number
[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Cards' distribution devices.
Press ENTER to view individual distribution devices' inventory information.
Distribution
Inventory
Menu
Distribution
Inventory
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
)
Page 2-20 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
POINT B#-P#A/B IS A
F/CB/PI
PANEL B#-P#A/B ASSEMBLY
####################
PANEL B#-P#A/B SERIAL #
####################
PANEL B#-P#A/B BOOTCODE
####################
PANEL B#-P#A/B SOFTWARE
####################
GO TO DISTRIBUTION
INVENTORY
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Distribution
Inventory
Detail Menu
Distribution
Inventory
Detail Menu
Distribution
Inventory
Detail Menu
Distribution
Inventory
Detail Menu
Distribution
Inventory
Detail Menu
Distribution device identification number and type.
(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Device
Position Number [Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
(F/CB/PI = Fuse or Circuit Breaker or PlugIn)
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
Distribution Devices' inventory information.
Distribution Panel Assembly Number.
(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number
[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
Distribution Panel Serial Number. (B#-P#A/B =
Bay Number-Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit
Card Position Number [Group A or B
Designation if applicable.])
Distribution Panel Bootcode Number.
(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number
[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
Distribution Panel Software Number.
(B#-P#A/B = Bay Number-Distribution Bus
Monitoring Circuit Card Position Number
[Group A or B Designation if applicable.])
Distribution
Inventory
Detail Menu
Distribution
Inventory
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
161
1 I/O BOARD IS
REPORTING
or
## I/O BOARDS ARE
REPORTING
or
NO I/O BOARDS ARE
INSTALLED
Inventory
Menu
Number of MCA I/O Circuit Cards in MCA inventory.
Press ENTER to view individual MCA I/O
Circuit Card inventory information. or
No MCA I/O Circuit Cards installed.
162
I/O BOARD B#-P# IS
INSTALLED
I/O Board
Inventory
Menu
MCA I/O Circuit Card identification number.
(B#-P# = Bay Number-I/O Circuit Card Position
Number).
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
MCA I/O Circuit Cards' identification numbers.
163 GO TO INVENTORY MENU
I/O Board
Inventory
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-21
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
164
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
165
166
BOARD B#-P# ASSEMBLY
####################
BOARD B#-P# SERIAL #
####################
167
168
169
170
171
BOARD B#-P# BOOTCODE
####################
BOARD B#-P# SOFTWARE
####################
GO TO I/O BOARD
INVENTORY
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
1 ROUTER IS
REPORTING
or
## ROUTERS ARE
REPORTING
or
NO ROUTERS ARE
INSTALLED
172
ROUTER B# IS
INSTALLED
173
174
175
176
GO TO INVENTORY MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
ROUTER B# ASSEMBLY
####################
ROUTER B# SERIAL #
####################
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
I/O Board
Inventory
Menu
I/O Board
Inventory
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Inventory
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Inventory
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Inventory
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Inventory
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Inventory
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
MCA I/O Circuit Card Assembly Number.
(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card
Position Number).
MCA I/O Circuit Card Serial Number.
(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card
Position Number).
MCA I/O Circuit Card Bootcode Number.
(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card
Position Number).
MCA I/O Circuit Card Software Number.
(B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card
Position Number).
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Inventory
Menu
Number of Router Circuit Cards in MCA inventory.
Press ENTER to view individual Router Circuit
Card inventory information. or
No Router Circuit Cards installed.
Router
Inventory
Menu
Router Circuit Card identification number. (B#
= Bay Number).
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
Router Circuit Cards' identification numbers.
Router
Inventory
Menu
Router
Inventory
Menu
Router
Inventory
Detail Menu
Router
Inventory
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Router Assembly Number.
(B# = Bay Number).
Router Serial Number.
(B# = Bay Number).
Page 2-22 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
ROUTER B# BOOTCODE
####################
ROUTER B# SOFTWARE
####################
GO TO ROUTER
INVENTORY
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
1 RELAY BOARD IS
REPORTING
or
## RELAY BOARDS ARE
REPORTING
or
NO RELAY BOARDS ARE
INSTALLED
RELAY BOARD B#-P# IS
INSTALLED
GO TO INVENTORY MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
BOARD B#-P# ASSEMBLY
####################
BOARD B#-P# SERIAL #
####################
BOARD B#-P# BOOTCODE
####################
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Router
Inventory
Detail Menu
Router
Inventory
Detail Menu
Router
Inventory
Detail Menu
Router
Inventory
Detail Menu
Router Bootcode Number.
(B# = Bay Number).
Router Software Number.
(B# = Bay Number).
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Inventory
Menu
Relay
Inventory
Menu
Number of MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit
Cards in MCA inventory.
Press ENTER to view individual MCA
Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card inventory information. or
No MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Cards installed.
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card identification number. (B#-P# = Bay Number-
Relay Circuit Card Position Number).
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to view other
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Cards' identification numbers.
Relay
Inventory
Menu
Relay
Inventory
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Relay
Inventory
Detail Menu
Relay
Inventory
Detail Menu
Relay
Inventory
Detail Menu
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card
Assembly Number. (B#-P# = Bay
Number-MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit
Card Position Number).
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Serial
Number. (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA
Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Position
Number).
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card
Bootcode Number. (B#-P# = Bay
Number-MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit
Card Position Number).
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-23
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
188
BOARD B#-P# SOFTWARE
####################
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
GO TO RELAY BOARD
INVENTORY
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REPORTING
or
NO TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
MONITORING IS
REPORTING
or
NO MONITORING IS
INSTALLED
MONITORING ASSEMBLY
####################
MONITORING SERIAL #
####################
MONITORING BOOTCODE
####################
MONITORING SOFTWARE
####################
GO TO INVENTORY MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
SENSE VOLTAGE IS
REMOTE INPUT
or
SENSE VOLTAGE IS
AVERAGED
CONTROLLER ASSEMBLY
####################
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Relay
Inventory
Detail Menu
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card
Software Number. (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA
Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Position
Number).
Relay
Inventory
Detail Menu
Relay
Inventory
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Inventory
Menu
Temperature Sensor is in MCA inventory. or
No Temperature Sensor installed.
Inventory
Menu
Monitoring
Inventory
Detail Menu
Router
Inventory
Detail Menu
Monitoring
Inventory
Detail Menu
Monitoring
Inventory
Detail Menu
Monitoring
Inventory
Detail Menu
Monitoring
Inventory
Detail Menu
Inventory
Menu
Inventory
Menu
Definition
LMS1000 is communicating with the MCA. circuit card.
CPU circuit card. or
No LMS1000 installed in the MCA's inventory.
Specification number (Spec. No.) of the
LMS1000 Main CPU circuit card.
Serial number of the LMS1000 Main CPU
Software bootcode revision number of the
LMS1000 Main CPU circuit card.
Software version number of the LMS1000 Main
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Indicates if an external (remote) voltage input
(for MCA alarms and meter reading) is applied to the MCA / Router circuit card, or if the voltage input for MCA alarms and meter reading is the average of each bay's sense voltages (no external input applied).
Specification number (Spec. No.) of the
MCA/Router circuit card.
Page 2-24 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
CONTROLLER SERIAL #
####################
CONTROLLER BOOTCODE
####################
CONTROLLER SOFTWARE
####################
DISPLAY ASSEMBLY
####################
DISPLAY SERIAL #
####################
DISPLAY BOOTCODE
####################
DISPLAY SOFTWARE
####################
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
GO TO INVENTORY MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
UPDATE THE INVENTORY
GO TO FUNCTION MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
ADJUST THE SYSTEM
VOLTS & AMPS
FLOAT SETPOINT
= vv.vvV
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Controller
Detail Menu
Controller
Detail Menu
Controller
Detail Menu
Controller
Detail Menu
Controller
Detail Menu
Controller
Detail Menu
Controller
Detail Menu
Controller
Detail Menu
Controller
Detail Menu
Inventory
Menu
Serial number of the MCA/Router circuit card.
Software bootcode version number of the
MCA/Router circuit card.
Software version number of the MCA/Router circuit card.
Specification number (Spec. No.) of the Display circuit card.
Serial number of the Display circuit card.
Software bootcode version number of the
Display circuit card.
Software version number of the Display circuit card.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Allows resetting the inventory count when an inventory item is removed from the system by the user.
When an inventory item is removed from the system, an alarm will be reported until
"UPDATE THE INVENTORY" is entered.
Example, if a Rectifier Module (PCU) is removed from the system, the Rectifier
Module will not be removed from the
MCA's inventory until "UPDATE THE
INVENTORY" operation is completed.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Inventory
Menu
Inventory
Menu
Function
Menu
System
Adjustment
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Press ENTER to go to the System Adjustment
Menu.
Allows you to change the Float Output Voltage set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-25
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
215
216
217
218
Message Displayed
TEST/EQUALIZE
= vv.vvV
POWER SHARE IS OFF
TURN IT ON?
or
POWER SHARE IS ON
TURN IT OFF?
or
ALT. LIMIT IS OFF
TURN IT ON?
or
ALT. LIMIT IS ON
TURN IT OFF?
or
TURN OFF POWER SHARE
or
TURN OFF ALTERNATE
CURRENT LIMIT
or
TURN OFF TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
PS INITIAL CAPACITY
LIMIT = ##%
PS VOLTAGE OFFSET
= v.vV
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
System
Adjustment
Menu
Allows you to change the Test/Equalize Output
Voltage set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
System
Adjustment
Menu
Allows you to enable or disable the Power
Share or Alternate Current Limit feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter. or
The Power Share feature requires
Temperature Compensation and Alternate
Current Limit to be turned off. The Alternate
Current Limit feature requires Temperature
Compensation and Power Share to be turned off. A message is displayed if Temperature
Compensation, Power Share, or Alternate
Current Limit is on. Turn the feature off first, then return to this menu to enable Power Share or Alternate Current Limit.
System
Adjustment
Menu
System
Adjustment
Menu
Enter the percentage value of the total capacity of THIS Power System that will initially feed the load. This value must be set to ensure that the current delivered by THIS Power System is lower than the total load current from the two
DC power systems.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Enter the value that will be added to the float voltage to ensure THIS Power System will initially carry the load. This value must be higher than the sum of the voltage drop in the cables connecting the two systems in parallel and the output voltage regulation specific to the rectifiers of the existing DC power system. If the sense leads are connected to the same sensing points as the existing DC power system, the Voltage Offset should take into consideration the output voltage regulation only.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
)
Page 2-26 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
218A
219
220
221
222
ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT
= ##%
HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
= vv.vvV
TEST H.V. SHUTDOWN
= vv.vvV
LOSS IS POSSIBLE. GO
AHEAD ANYWAY?
PCU CURRENT LIMIT
= aaaaaA
or
PCU CURRENT LIMIT
= aaaaaMAX
or
PCU CURRENT LIMIT
POWER SHARE
or
PCU CURRENT LIMIT
ALT. LIMIT
100% PCU CURRENT IS aaaaaA
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
System
Adjustment
Menu
System
Adjustment
Menu
System
Adjustment
Menu
System
Adjustment
Menu
System
Adjustment
Menu
Enter the percentage value of the rated rectifier output capacity to which the rectifier output current should be limited.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the High Voltage
Shutdown set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to temporarily change the High
Voltage Shutdown set point to another value
(such as system voltage) to test the high voltage shutdown circuits.
1. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF
(at the same time).
2. Press YES / + / i or NO / - to increment or decrement, respectively, the High
Voltage Shutdown value displayed.
3. A WARNING appears. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF (at the same time) if you wish to proceed. This immediately changes the HVS setting.
The HVS setting reverts back to its previous setting by pressing ENTER, or simultaneously pressing YES / + / i and NO / -.
Allows you to change the Current Limit set point. aaaaaA = System current limit setting, current limit circuit on all Rectifier Modules are automatically adjusted to ensure system current does not exceed this value. aaaaaMAX
= System current limit setting is set to the sum of the maximum current capacities of all
Rectifier Modules installed in the system.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: When Power Share is enabled, current limit is controlled by the Power Share feature.
Note: When Alternate Current Limit is enabled and active, current limit is controlled by the
Alternate Current Limit feature.
This value is only displayed. MCA calculates the value from all Rectifier Modules (PCUs) installed. There is no user adjustment.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-27
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
223 GO TO FUNCTION MENU
224
225
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
ADJUST THE ALARM
SETPOINTS
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #1
= vv.vvV
SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #2
= vv.vvV
BATTERY ON DISCHARGE
= vv.vvV
VERY LOW VOLTAGE
= vv.vvV
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT
= aaaaaA
DISTRIBUTION GROUP A
= aaaaaA
DISTRIBUTION GROUP B
= aaaaaA
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
System
Adjustment
Menu
System
Adjustment
Menu
Function
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Press ENTER to go to the Alarm Adjustment
Menu.
Allows you to change the System High Voltage
#1 Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the System High Voltage
#2 Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Battery on Discharge
Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Very Low Voltage
Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Total Load Current
Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Distribution Group A
Load Current Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Distribution Group B
Load Current Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Page 2-28 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
233
234
235
236
237
HIGH TEMPERATURE #1
= ttt C/F
or
NO HIGH TEMPERATURE
#1 ALARM
HIGH TEMPERATURE #2
= ttt C/F
or
NO HIGH TEMPERATURE
#2 ALARM
LOW TEMPERATURE #1
= ttt C/F
or
NO LOW TEMPERATURE
#1 ALARM
LOW TEMPERATURE #2
= ttt C/F
or
NO LOW TEMPERATURE
#2 ALARM
GO TO FUNCTION MENU
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Allows you to change the High Temperature #1
Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
YES / + / i when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO HIGH
TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM
(displayed when you scroll up to
"100 C").
Allows you to change the High Temperature #2
Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
YES / + / i when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO HIGH
TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM
(displayed when you scroll up to
"100 C").
Allows you to change the Low Temperature #1
Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or
Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO LOW
TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM
(displayed when you scroll down to
"-50 C").
Allows you to change the Low Temperature #2
Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO LOW
TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM
(displayed when you scroll down to
"-50 C").
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-29
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
238
239
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
TURN PCUs ON OR OFF
or
ENERGY MANAGEMENT IS
IN CONTROL
240
241
242
243
244
PCU B#-ID#/N# ON
TURN IT OFF?
or
PCU B#-ID#/N# OFF
TURN IT ON?
or
ENERGY MANAGEMENT
IN CONTROL
GO TO FUNCTION MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
CHANGE CONFIGURATION
PARAMETERS
CHANGE I/O BOARD
PARAMETERS
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Alarm
Adjustment
Menu
Function
Menu
Definition
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Press ENTER to go to the Rectifier Module
(PCU) Enable Menu.
PCU
Enable Menu
Allows you to turn a Rectifier Module (PCU)
ON or OFF (Local TR inhibit feature).
1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the Rectifier Module to turn
ON or OFF (B#-ID#/N# = Bay Number-
Rectifier Module MCA ID# w/in
Bay/Number of Rectifier Modules in
System).
2. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF
(at the same time) to change the TR setting for this Rectifier Module.
3. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press either YES / + / i to accept the new setting, or NO / - to cancel this operation without changing the existing setting.
Note: Rectifier Modules cannot be turned on or off if energy management is active.
PCU
Enable Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
PCU
Enable Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Function
Menu
Press ENTER to go to the Configure Menu.
Configure
Menu
Allows you to change the MCA I/O circuit card(s) configurable parameters.
Press ENTER to configure the MCA I/O circuit cards.
Page 2-30 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
245
246
247
ANALOG INPUT B#-P# IS
DISTRIBUTION
or
ANALOG INPUT B#-P# IS
AUXILIARY
ANALOG INPUT B#-P#
50mV = aaaaaA
ANALOG OUTPUT B#-P#
50mV = aaaaaA
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
I/O Board
Configuration
Menu
Select the MCA I/O circuit card to be configured, and designate the analog input for this MCA I/O circuit card as "Distribution" or
"Auxiliary". The MCA displays the AUXILIARY load currents in a separate menu, the
DISTRIBUTION load currents are added to the
Distribution Menus.
1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the MCA I/O circuit card to configure (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA
I/O Circuit Card Position Number).
2. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF
(at the same time) to change the setting for this MCA I/O circuit card.
3. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press either YES / + / i to accept the new setting, or NO / - to cancel this operation without changing the existing setting.
I/O Board
Configuration
Menu
Select the MCA I/O circuit card to be configured, and set the scale factor for the analog input on this MCA I/O circuit card.
1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the MCA I/O circuit card to configure (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA
I/O Circuit Card Position Number).
2. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this document to complete the operation.
I/O Board
Configuration
Menu
Select the MCA I/O circuit card to be configured, and set the scale factor for the analog output on this MCA I/O circuit card.
1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the MCA I/O circuit card to configure (B#-P# = Bay Number-MCA
I/O Circuit Card Position Number).
2. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this document to complete the operation.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-31
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
248
249
250
251
252
Message Displayed
BINARY INPUT B#-P#-I#
ALARM = CLOSED
or
BINARY INPUT B#-P#-I#
ALARM = OPEN
GO TO CONFIGURE MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
AUDIBLE SILENT TIME
= mm MINUTES
or
AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY
SILENCED
PCU SEQUENCING IS
DISABLED
or
PCU SEQUENCING DELAY
= ss SECONDS
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
I/O Board
Configuration
Menu
Select the MCA I/O circuit card to be configured, and set the alarm state for each binary input on this MCA I/O circuit card.
1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the MCA I/O circuit card and binary input to configure (B#-P#-I#
= Bay Number-MCA I/O Circuit Card
Position Number-Binary Input
Number).
2. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF
(at the same time) to change the setting for this MCA I/O circuit card.
3. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press either YES / + / i to accept the new setting, or NO / - to cancel this operation without changing the existing setting.
I/O Board
Configuration
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
I/O Board
Configuration
Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Configure
Menu
Allows you to enable the MCA Audible Alarm feature and set the Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset
Time Period set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to AUDIBLE ALARMS
STAY SILENCED (displayed when you scroll down to "zero minutes").
Configure
Menu
Allows you to enable the Rectifier Module
(PCU) Sequencing feature and set the Rectifier
Module (PCU) Sequencing Delay set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to Rectifier
SEQUENCING IS DISABLED
(displayed when you scroll down to
"zero seconds").
)
Page 2-32 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
253
TEST EQUALIZE IS DISABLED
or
MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE
= hh HOURS
or
TEST/EQUALIZE STOP
IS MANUAL
or
END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hh.hh HOURS
or
TURN OFF POWER SHARE
or
TURN OFF ALTERNATE
CURRENT LIMIT
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Configure
Menu
Allows you to enable the Manual Timed
Test/Equalize feature and set the Timed
Test/Equalize set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to TEST/EQUALIZE
STOP IS MANUAL (displayed when you scroll down to "zero hours"). This indicates the manually initiated timed test/equalize feature is disabled and the system must be manually returned to the float mode if placed in the test/equalize mode. or
If manually initiated timed test/equalize feature is enabled and the system is placed in the test/equalize mode (via the MCA interface), remaining test/equalize time is displayed.
Note: When TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS
MANUAL or END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh
HOURS is being displayed, press and release
ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF simultaneously to change the MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh
HOURS setting. or
When the Power Share or Alternate Current
Limit feature is enabled, the system cannot be placed in the Test/Equalize mode.
Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power
Share and Alternate Current Limit to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share or
Alternate Current Limit is on. Turn Power
Share or Alternate Current Limit off first then return to this menu.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-33
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
254
255
256
257
258
Message Displayed
AUTO EQUALIZE IS
DISABLED
or
AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE
or
END AUTO EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS
or
TURN OFF POWER SHARE
or
TURN OFF ALTERNATE
CURRENT LIMIT
DEFINE RELAY
FUNCTIONS
DEFINE RELAY
FUNCTION A#
GO TO CONFIGURE MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
Configure
Menu
Configure
Menu
Relay
Function
Menu
Allows you to enable the Auto Test/Equalize feature and set the Auto Test/Equalize
Multiplier set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to AUTO EQUALIZE IS
DISABLED (displayed when you scroll down to "zero x discharge"). or
Displays remaining auto test/equalize time if an auto test/equalize is in process. or
When the Power Share or Alternate Current
Limit feature is enabled, the system cannot be placed in the Test/Equalize mode.
Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power
Share and Alternate Current Limit to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share or
Alternate Current Limit is on. Turn Power
Share or Alternate Current Limit off first then return to this menu.
Allows you to define a Relay Function Channel by assigning alarm conditions to a specific
Relay Function Channel.
Press ENTER to define relay functions.
Select the Relay Function Channel to be defined.
1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the desired Relay Function
Channel. (A# = Relay Function
Channel Number.)
2. Press ENTER to define the selected
Relay Function Channel.
Note: See the table in Section 5876
(Installation Instructions) for the MCA default configuration.
Relay
Function
Menu
Relay
Function
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
)
Page 2-34 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
259
260
261
261A
262
263
CHECKED CONDITIONS
DE-ENERGIZE
ENERGIZE
SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS
VERY LOW
SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS
VERY LOW or
SYSTEM BATTERY ON
DISCHARGE or
SYSTEM BATTERY ON
DISCHARGE or
CHECKED CONDITIONS
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT ACTIVE or
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT ACTIVE
HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
INPUT ACTIVE or
HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
INPUT ACTIVE
ALTERNATE CURRENT
LIMIT ACTIVE
ALTERNATE CURRENT
LIMIT ACTIVE or
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Select whether the relay(s) assigned to this
Relay Function Channel will energize or deenergize for any condition checked
(selected) below.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-35
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
264
SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE
#1 ALARM or
SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE
#1 ALARM
265
266
267
268
269
SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE
#2 ALARM
SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE
#2 ALARM
1 SYSTEM BREAKER OR
FUSE ALARM
1 SYSTEM BREAKER OR
FUSE ALARM or or
2+ SYSTEM BREAKER &
FUSE ALARMS or
2+ SYSTEM BREAKER &
FUSE ALARMS
AC POWER IS OFF TO
1 PCU
1 PCU or
AC POWER IS OFF TO
AC POWER IS OFF TO
2+ PCUs
AC POWER IS OFF TO
2+ PCUs or
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Page 2-36 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
270
271
272
273
274
AC POWER IS OFF TO
ALL PCUs
AC POWER IS OFF TO
ALL PCUs
1 PCU FAILURE
ANY TYPE or
1 PCU FAILURE
ANY TYPE
2+ PCU FAILURES
ANY TYPE
2+ PCU FAILURES
ANY TYPE or or
1 PCU FAILURE
'MAJOR' TYPE or
1 PCU FAILURE
'MAJOR' TYPE
2+ PCU FAILURES
'MAJOR' TYPE or
2+ PCU FAILURES
'MAJOR' TYPE
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: Thermal Current Limit, 1 Fan Failure,
High Ambient Temperature, and Sense Loss are 'Minor' alarm conditions. All other Rectifier
Module alarms are 'Major' alarm conditions.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: Thermal Current Limit, 1 Fan Failure,
High Ambient Temperature, and Sense Loss are 'Minor' alarm conditions. All other Rectifier
Module alarms are 'Major' alarm conditions.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-37
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
275
276
277
278
279
1 PCU FAILURE
'MINOR' TYPE or
1 PCU FAILURE
'MINOR' TYPE
2+ PCU FAILURES
'MINOR' TYPE or
2+ PCU FAILURES
'MINOR' TYPE
NO PCUs ARE
IN INVENTORY or
NO PCUs ARE
IN INVENTORY
1 DIST. PANEL
FAILURE or
1 DIST. PANEL
FAILURE
2+ DIST. PANEL
FAILURES or
2+ DIST. PANEL
FAILURES
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: Thermal Current Limit, 1 Fan Failure,
High Ambient Temperature, and Sense Loss are 'Minor' alarm conditions. All other Rectifier
Module alarms are 'Major' alarm conditions.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: Thermal Current Limit, 1 Fan Failure,
High Ambient Temperature, and Sense Loss are 'Minor' alarm conditions. All other Rectifier
Module alarms are 'Major' alarm conditions.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Page 2-38 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
280
281
282
283
284
285
NO DIST. PANELS
IN INVENTORY
NO DIST. PANELS
IN INVENTORY
1 I/O BOARD
FAILURE
1 I/O BOARD
FAILURE
FAILURES
FAILURES or or
2+ I/O BOARD or
2+ I/O BOARD
NO I/O BOARDS ARE
IN INVENTORY or
NO I/O BOARDS ARE
IN INVENTORY
1 ROUTER FAILURE or
1 ROUTER FAILURE
2+ ROUTER FAILURES or
2+ ROUTER FAILURES
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-39
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
286
287
288
289
290
291
Message Displayed
NO ROUTERS ARE
IN INVENTORY or
NO ROUTERS ARE
IN INVENTORY
1 RELAY BOARD
FAILURE
1 RELAY BOARD
FAILURE
2+ RELAY BOARD
FAILURES
2+ RELAY BOARD
FAILURES
ALARM
HIGH TEMPERATURE #1
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM or or
NO RELAY BOARDS ARE
IN INVENTORY or
NO RELAY BOARDS ARE
IN INVENTORY
HIGH TEMPERATURE #1 or
HIGH TEMPERATURE #2 or
HIGH TEMPERATURE #2
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
)
Page 2-40 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
292
293
294
295
LOW TEMPERATURE #1
ALARM
LOW TEMPERATURE #1
ALARM
ALARM
ALARM or
LOW TEMPERATURE #2 or
LOW TEMPERATURE #2
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NO SIGNAL
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NO SIGNAL or
MAJOR MONITORING
ALARM(S)
MAJOR MONITORING
ALARM(S) or
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: If any of these LMS1000 conditions are selected to contribute to an MCA alarm, the
User must ensure that the LMS1000 is programmed so that the MCA does not contribute to the LMS1000 condition.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-41
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
296
297
298
299
Message Displayed
MINOR MONITORING
ALARM(S)
ALARM(S) or
MINOR MONITORING
All Monitoring LED
Messages
Messages or
All Monitoring LED
MONITORING DOES NOT
RESPOND or
MONITORING DOES NOT
RESPOND
CONTROLLER FAILURE or
CONTROLLER FAILURE
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: If any of these LMS1000 conditions are selected to contribute to an MCA alarm, the
User must ensure that the LMS1000 is programmed so that the MCA does not contribute to the LMS1000 condition.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: If any of these LMS1000 conditions are selected to contribute to an MCA alarm, the
User must ensure that the LMS1000 is programmed so that the MCA does not contribute to the LMS1000 condition.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
)
Page 2-42 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
300
301
302
303
304
305
THE CONTROLLER IS
INITIALIZING
THE CONTROLLER IS
INITIALIZING
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT
ALARM
LOAD ALARM
DIST. GROUP B
LOAD ALARM or
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT
ALARM
DIST. GROUP A
LOAD ALARM
DIST. GROUP A
LOAD ALARM or or
DIST. GROUP B or
THE DISPLAY DOES
NOT RESPOND or
THE DISPLAY DOES
NOT RESPOND
TEST/EQUALIZE MODE
IS ACTIVE
TEST/EQUALIZE MODE
IS ACTIVE or
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-43
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
306
307
308
309
Message Displayed
THE AUDIBLE ALARM
IS ACTIVE or
THE AUDIBLE ALARM
IS ACTIVE
AUDIBLE ALARMS ARE
SILENCED
MENU or
AUDIBLE ALARMS ARE
SILENCED
GO TO RELAY FUNCTION
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
This condition is selected when the
(checkmark) symbol is displayed.
This condition is deselected when a space is displayed instead of the (checkmark) symbol.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Relay
Function
Definition
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
)
Page 2-44 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
310
311
312
START RELAY FUNCTION
TEST
or
TIME PER FUNCTION
= hh:mm:ss
or
TIME PER FUNCTION
NO TIMEOUT
or
AUTOMATICALLY TEST
ALL FUNCTIONS
or
TEST RELAY FUNCTION
A#
or
STOP RELAY FUNCTION
TEST
or
TESTING FUNCTION A#
= hh:mm:ss
or
TESTING FUNCTION A#
NO TIMEOUT
ASSIGN RELAYS TO
FUNCTIONS
ASSIGN RELAY B#-P#-R#
FUNCTION A#
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Configure
Menu
Configure
Menu
Relay
Assignment
Menu
Set, activate, monitor, or stop the progress of the MCA Customer Alarm Relay Test Feature.
1. With START RELAY FUNCTION TEST being displayed, press ENTER and
ALARM CUTOFF (at the same time).
2. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to select a time period for each Relay
Function Channel test or select NO
TIMEOUT.
3. Press ENTER.
4. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to select either AUTOMATICALY TEST
ALL FUNCTIONS (to test all relay function channels), or TEST RELAY
FUNCTION A# (to test an individual relay function channel).
5. Press ENTER.
6. To start the Relay Function Test; press the UP ARROW, to cancel press the
DOWN ARROW.
7. The Relay Function being tested and the remaining time are displayed.
8. To terminate the test, press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF (at the same time) until STOP RELAY FUNCTION
TEST is displayed.
9. To stop the test, press UP ARROW.
To keep the test running, press DOWN
ARROW.
10. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press YES / + / i.
Allows you to configure a relay by assigning a
Relay Function Channel to a specific relay.
Press ENTER to assign relays to functions.
Select the MCA Customer Alarm Relay to be configured, and assign a relay function channel to this relay.
1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to navigate to the desired relay.
(B#-P#-R# = Bay Number-MCA
Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card
Position Number-Relay Number).
2. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this document to complete the operation.
Note: See the table in Section 5876
(Installation Instructions) for the MCA default configuration.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-45
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802
Associated with ...
NLDB , 802
Definition
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
GO TO CONFIGURE MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
NO TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
or
TEMPERATURE SLOPE
= 0.vvvV/ C/F
or
TURN OFF POWER SHARE
or
TURN OFF ALTERNATE
CURRENT LIMIT
MAXIMUM COMPENSATION
= vv.vvV
MINIMUM COMPENSATION
= vv.vvV
NOW DISPLAYING C/F
SET TO C/F?
IT IS NOW hh:mm:ss dd-mon-yy
Relay
Assignment
Menu
Relay
Assignment
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Configure
Menu
Configure
Menu
Configure
Menu
Configure
Menu
Configure
Menu
Allows you to enable the Battery Charge
Temperature Compensation feature and set the Battery Charge Temperature
Compensation Slope set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION (displayed when you scroll down to "0V/ C").
Note: This is the voltage slope of the entire battery string, not individual cells.
Note: The Temperature Compensation feature requires Power Share and Alternate Current
Limit to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share or Alternate Current Limit is on.
Turn Power Share or Alternate Current Limit off first then return to this menu to enable
Temperature Compensation.
Allows you to change the Maximum Voltage with Temperature Compensation set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Minimum Voltage with Temperature Compensation set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the temperature unit
(degrees F or degrees C).
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the time and time.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
)
Page 2-46 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
320
320A
320B
320C
320D
320E
320F
320G
320H
ERASE THE ALARM LOG
CHANGE NETWORK
ADDRESSES
##.##.##.##.##.##
MAC ADDRESS
###.###.###.###
IP ADDRESS
###.###.###.###
NET MASK ADDRESS
###.###.###.###
GATEWAY ADDRESS
VALIDATE THE ADDRESS
CHANGES?
or
UPDATE/RESTART LMS
WITH CHANGES?
or
THE CHANGES WERE
REJECTED
GO TO CONFIGURE MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Configure
Menu
Configure
Menu
Network
Address
Menu
Deletes all MCA Alarm Log entries.
1. Refer to "Changing a Control Function" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to view and change the network IP, gateway, and netmask addresses used by the
LMS1000 when connecting to the network.
Displays the Ethernet (MAC) address used by the LMS1000 when connecting to the network.
Note: This address cannot be changed, only viewed.
Allows you to change the IP address used by the LMS1000 when connecting to the network.
Network
Address
Menu
Network
Address
Menu
Network
Address
Menu
Network
Address
Menu
Allows you to change the netmask address used by the LMS1000 when connecting to the network.
Allows you to change the gateway address used by the LMS1000 when connecting to the network.
This allows you to save the address changes that were made. The system must first verify that the new IP, netmask, and gateway addresses are compatible with each other. or
This allows you to pass the saved addresses to the LMS1000.
Note: The LMS1000 will need to be restarted for the address changes to take effect. or
The new IP, netmask, and gateway addresses are not compatible with each other. The changes are not accepted.
Network
Address
Menu
Network
Address
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
321
321A
321B
321C
321D
321E
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-47
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
321F
321G
322
322A
323
324
325
326
327
328
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802
Associated with ...
NLDB , 802
Definition
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
GO TO FUNCTION MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
VERIFY TEST, ESTOP,
& HVS INPUTS
or
TEST SHUTDOWN INPUT
IS ON
or
EMERGENCY STOP INPUT
IS ON
or
HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
INPUT IS ON
VIEW THE ALARM LOG dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
CONTROLLER or dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
CONTROLLER
♪
SYSTEM CONTROLLER
NO ALARMS
EMERGENCY STOP
INPUT ACTIVE
HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
INPUT ACTIVE
Configure
Menu
Configure
Menu
Function
Menu
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Allows you to verify the test, emergency stop, and high voltage shutdown inputs.
1. Navigate to this menu item.
2. Apply the Test input. Verify MCA displays TEST SHUTDOWN INPUT IS
ON.
3. With the Test input still applied, apply the Emergency Stop input. Verify MCA displays EMERGENCY STOP INPUT
IS ON. Release the Emergency Stop input.
4. With the Test input still applied, apply the High Voltage Shutdown input.
Verify MCA displays HI VOLTAGE
SHUTDOWN INPUT IS ON. Release the High Voltage Shutdown input.
5. Release the Test input.
Function
Menu
Press ENTER to view the MCA Alarm Log.
Alarm Log
Menu
Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Controller element of the system. Note that the recordable alarm conditions are set by configuring MCA
Relay Function Channel #24. The factory
defaults are shown in this chart.
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.
A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'
() indicates the alarm retired.
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
)
Page 2-48 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
328A
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
ALTERNATE CURRENT
LIMIT ACTIVE
SYSTEM VOLTAGE IS
VERY LOW
SYSTEM BATTERY IS ON
DISCHARGE
SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE
#1 ALARM
SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE
#2 ALARM
NO PCUs ARE
IN INVENTORY
NO DIST. PANELS ARE
IN INVENTORY
NO ROUTERS ARE
IN INVENTORY
NO RELAY BOARDS ARE
IN INVENTORY
HIGH TEMPERATURE #1
ALARM
HIGH TEMPERATURE #2
ALARM
LOW TEMPERATURE #1
ALARM
LOW TEMPERATURE #2
ALARM
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
NO SIGNAL
MAJOR MONITORING
ALARM(S)
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-49
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
343
MINOR MONITORING
ALARM(S)
344
Monitoring LED
Messages
345
346
MONITORING DOES NOT
RESPOND
CONTROLLER FAILURE
####
347
348
349
350
THE CONTROLLER IS
INITIALIZING
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT
ALARM
GROUP A LOAD CURRENT
ALARM
GROUP B LOAD CURRENT
ALARM
351
352
353
THE DISPLAY DOES NOT
RESPOND
SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA
354
355
356
GO TO ALARM LOG MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
B#-SN# or
♪ dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
B#-SN#
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
MCA
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable MCA (Controller) event.
Recordable System Data.
Recordable System Data.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Alarm Log
Menu
Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Rectifier element of the system.
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.
A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'
() indicates the alarm retired.
Page 2-50 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
PCU B#-SN#
NO ALARMS
PCU B#-SN#
EMERG. STOP
PCU B#-SN#
H.V. SHUTDOWN
PCU B#-SN#
AC LINE OFF
PCU B#-SN#
AC LINE LOW
PCU B#-SN#
AC LINE HIGH
PCU B#-SN#
AC PHASE LOST
PCU B#-SN#
POWER FACTOR
PCU B#-SN#
DC/DC CONV.
PCU B#-SN#
FUSE/BREAKER
PCU B#-SN#
INHIBITED
PCU B#-SN#
ON STANDBY
PCU B#-SN#
THERMAL LIMIT
PCU B#-SN#
THERMAL STOP
PCU B#-SN#
HIGH AMBIENT
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-51
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
372
PCU B#-SN#
LOAD SHARE
373
374
PCU B#-SN#
1 FAN SPEED
PCU B#-SN#
2+ FANS SPEED
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
PCU B#-SN#
NO VOLT SENSE
PCU B#-SN#
DUPLICATED
PCU B#-SN#
NO RESPONSE
PCU B#-SN#
TURNED ON
PCU B#-SN#
TURNED OFF or
PCU B#-SN# aaaaaA
SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA
382 GO TO ALARM LOG MENU
383
384
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
PANEL B#-P#A/B or
♪ dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
PANEL B#-P#A/B
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) event.
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) Data.
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
PCU
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable Rectifier Module (PCU) Data.
Recordable System Data.
Recordable System Data.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Alarm Log
Menu
Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Distribution Panel element of the system.
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.
A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'
() indicates the alarm retired.
Page 2-52 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
385
386
387
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
NO ALARMS
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
DISCONNECTED
POSITION B#-P#A/B
IS OPEN
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
388
POSITION B#-P#A/B
NOT FOUND or
POSITION NOT FOUND
PANEL B#-P#A/B
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
POSITION B#-P#A/B
TYPE UNKNOWN
POSITION B#-P#A/B
OVER CURRENT
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
LVD FAILURE
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
A/B CHANGED
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
PROCESSOR
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B IS
DUPLICATED
DIST. PANEL B#-P#A/B
NO RESPONSE
SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA
GO TO ALARM LOG MENU
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
Recordable Distribution Panel event.
Recordable System Data.
Recordable System Data.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-53
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
399
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410 dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
I/O B#-P#
I/O BOARD B#-P#
NO ALARMS
I/O BOARD B#-P#
BINARY I#
I/O BOARD B#-P#
OVER CURRENT
I/O BOARD B#-P#
PROCESSOR
I/O BOARD B#-P#
IS DUPLICATED
I/O BOARD B#-P#
NO RESPONSE
SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA
GO TO ALARM LOG MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING or
♪ dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
I/O B#-P#
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
Distribution
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Alarm Log
Menu
Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the MCA I/O element of the system.
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.
A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'
() indicates the alarm retired.
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
I/O Board
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable System Data.
Recordable System Data.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Page 2-54 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424 dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
ROUTER B#
ROUTER B#
NO ALARMS or dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
ROUTER B#
♪
ROUTER B# REMOTE
SENSE OPEN
ROUTER B# INTERNAL
SENSE OPEN
ROUTER B# PROCESSOR
FAILURE
ROUTER B# REPORTS AN
ILLEGAL NODE
ROUTER B# IS
DUPLICATED
ROUTER B# DOES NOT
RESPOND
ROUTER B# REMOTE
SENSE vv.vvV
ROUTER B# INTERNAL
SENSE vv.vvV
SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA
GO TO ALARM LOG MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Alarm Log
Menu
Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Router element of the system.
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.
A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'
() indicates the alarm retired.
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Router
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Recordable Router event.
Recordable Router event.
Recordable Router event.
Recordable Router event.
Recordable Router event.
Recordable Router event.
Recordable Router event.
Recordable Router Data.
Recordable Router Data.
Recordable System Data.
Recordable System Data.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-55
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
425 dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss ♪
RELAY B#-P# or dd-mon-yy hh:mm:ss
RELAY B#-P#
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
RELAY BOARD B#-P#
NO ALARMS
RELAY B#-P#-R# IS
STUCK
RELAY BOARD B#-P#
PROCESSOR
RELAY BOARD B#-P# IS
DUPLICATED
RELAY BOARD B#-P#
NO RESPONSE
SYSTEM OUTPUT SENSE vv.vvV
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT aaaaaA
433
434
435
436
GO TO ALARM LOG MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
GO TO FUNCTION MENU
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
Alarm Log
Menu
Displays the alarms (with date and time stamp) recorded for the Relay element of the system.
Press UP and DOWN ARROWS to scroll if multiple alarms are recorded.
A 'music note' ( ♪) after the date/time stamp indicates the alarm went active. A 'checkmark'
() indicates the alarm retired.
Relay
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Relay
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Relay
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Relay
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Relay
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Relay
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Relay
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Relay
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Relay
Alarm Log
Detail Menu
Alarm Log
Menu
Alarm Log
Menu
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable Relay event.
Recordable System Data.
Recordable System Data.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Press ENTER to go to this menu.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
Page 2-56 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
A
PCU B#-ID#/N#
RECOGNIZED or
DSM B#-P#A/B
RECOGNIZED
I/O B#-P#
RECOGNIZED or or
CRM B#
RECOGNIZED or
RCB B#-P#
RECOGNIZED
GO BACK TO MENU TREE
BEGINNING
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
Function
Menu
Function
Menu
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
NO FUNCTION IN THIS SYSTEM
############ WAIT ##
V###########
Initialization
Menu
B
C
D
E
CHECK VALUES BEFORE
STARTING
FLOAT SETPOINT
= vv.vvV
TEST/EQUALIZE
= vv.vvV
HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
= vv.vvV
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Lists the last item in the system that was recognized by the MCA.
Press ENTER to go to the beginning of the
MCA Menu Tree.
When the system is initially started, an initialization time and MCA software version number are displayed.
Allows you to view (and change) the MCA settings stored in memory before starting the system.
1. Press the UP and DOWN ARROWS to view (change) the following MCA settings.
Allows you to change the Float Output Voltage set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Test/Equalize Output
Voltage set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the High Voltage
Shutdown set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-57
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
Message Displayed
PCU CURRENT LIMIT
= aaaaaA
= vv.vvV
= vv.vvV
= vv.vvV
= aaaaaA
= aaaaaA
= aaaaaA or
PCU CURRENT LIMIT
POWER SHARE
SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #1
SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #2
BATTERY ON DISCHARGE
= vv.vvV
VERY LOW VOLTAGE
TOTAL LOAD CURRENT
DISTRIBUTION GROUP A
DISTRIBUTION GROUP B
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
Associated with ...
Definition
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Allows you to change the Current Limit set point. aaaaaA = System current limit setting, current limit circuit on all Rectifier Modules are automatically adjusted to ensure system current does not exceed this value.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: When Power Share is enabled, current limit is controlled by the Power Share feature.
Allows you to change the System High Voltage
#1 Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the System High Voltage
#2 Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Battery on Discharge
Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Very Low Voltage
Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Total Distribution
Load Current Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Distribution Group A
Load Current Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Distribution Group B
Load Current Alarm set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
)
Page 2-58 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
N
O
P
Q
HIGH TEMPERATURE #1
= ttt C/F
HIGH TEMPERATURE #2
= ttt C/F
NO HIGH TEMPERATURE
#2 ALARM or
LOW TEMPERATURE #1
= ttt C/F or
NO LOW TEMPERATURE
#1 ALARM
LOW TEMPERATURE #2
= ttt C/F or
NO LOW TEMPERATURE
#2 ALARM or
NO HIGH TEMPERATURE
#1 ALARM
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Allows you to change the High Temperature #1
Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
YES / + / i when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO HIGH
TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM
(displayed when you scroll up to
"100 C").
Allows you to change the High Temperature #2
Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
YES / + / i when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO HIGH
TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM
(displayed when you scroll up to
"100 C").
Allows you to change the Low Temperature #1
Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO LOW
TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM
(displayed when you scroll down to
"-50 C").
Allows you to change the Low Temperature #2
Alarm set point, or disable the alarm.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO LOW
TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM
(displayed when you scroll down to
"-50 C").
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-59
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
R
S
T
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802
Associated with ...
NLDB , 802
Definition
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
AUDIBLE SILENT TIME
= mm MINUTES or
AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY
SILENCED
PCU SEQUENCING IS
DISABLED or
PCU SEQUENCING DELAY
= ss SECONDS
TEST EQUALIZE IS DISABLED
TURN OFF POWER SHARE or
MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE
= hh HOURS or
TEST/EQUALIZE STOP
IS MANUAL
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Allows you to enable the MCA Audible Alarm feature and set the Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset
Time Period set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to AUDIBLE ALARMS
STAY SILENCED (displayed when you scroll down to "zero minutes").
Allows you to enable the Rectifier Sequencing feature and set the Rectifier Sequencing Delay set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to Rectifier
SEQUENCING IS DISABLED
(displayed when you scroll down to
"zero seconds").
Allows you to enable the Manual Timed
Test/Equalize feature and set the Timed
Test/Equalize set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to TEST/EQUALIZE
STOP IS MANUAL (displayed when you scroll down to "zero hours"). This indicates the manually initiated timed test/equalize feature is disabled and the system must be manually returned to the float mode if placed in the test/equalize mode.
When the Power Share feature is enabled, the system cannot be placed in the Test/Equalize mode.
Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power
Share to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share is on. Turn Power Share off first then return to this menu.
)
Page 2-60 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Associated with ...
U
V
W
X
AUTO EQUALIZE IS
DISABLED or
AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE or
TURN OFF POWER SHARE
NO TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION
TEMPERATURE SLOPE
= 0.vvvV/ C/F or
TURN OFF POWER SHARE or
MAXIMUM COMPENSATION
= vv.vvV
MINIMUM COMPENSATION
= vv.vvV
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Definition
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Allows you to enable the Auto Test/Equalize feature and set the Auto Test/Equalize
Multiplier set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to AUTO EQUALIZE IS
DISABLED (displayed when you scroll down to "zero x discharge").
When the Power Share feature is enabled, the system cannot be placed in the Test/Equalize mode.
Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power
Share to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share is on. Turn Power Share off first then return to this menu.
Allows you to enable the Battery Charge
Temperature Compensation feature and set the Battery Charge Temperature
Compensation Slope set point, or disable the feature.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Note: To disable the feature, press
NO / - when in the change setting mode to scroll to NO TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION (displayed when you scroll down to "0V / ~").
Note: This is the voltage slope of the entire battery string, not individual cells.
Note: The Temperature Compensation feature requires Power Share to be turned off. A message is displayed if Power Share is on.
Turn Power Share off first then return to this menu to enable Temperature Compensation.
Allows you to change the Maximum Voltage with Temperature Compensation set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to change the Minimum Voltage with Temperature Compensation set point.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA Page 2-61
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Menu
Tree Line No.
(Section
5886)
Message Displayed
Y
IT IS NOW hh:mm:ss dd-mon-yy
Z
READY TO START THE
SYSTEM NOW?
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Associated with ...
Definition
Initialization
Menu
Initialization
Menu
Allows you to change the time and date.
1. Refer to "Changing a Value or Setting" in the table at the beginning of this chapter.
Allows you to start the system with the selected settings.
1. Press ENTER and ALARM CUTOFF
(at the same time).
2. At the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt, press YES / + / i.
Page 2-62 Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CHAPTER 3
SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Installing the USB Device Driver from the Furnished CD ......................................... 3-2
Setting up your Computer to Access the Power System .......................................... 3-3
LMS Main/Expansion CPU Circuit Card (if furnished) Controls and Indicators ........ 3-3
Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Remote) (if optional LMS installed) .......................... 3-8
Restarting Procedures when Rectifier is Automatically or Manually Inhibited, Shut
Rectifier Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect ..................................... 3-9
Placing the System into the Test/Equalize Mode of Operation .............................. 3-10
Method 1 (Manual Test/Equalize) Procedure ................................................... 3-10
Method 2 (Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize) Procedure ....................... 3-12
Method 3 (Automatic Test/Equalize) Procedure .............................................. 3-14
Method 4 (External Test/Equalize) Procedure ................................................. 3-16
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Mapping LMS LED Channels to the MCA Display and MCA Customer Alarm
Programming the MCA Power Share Feature in the New Power System ............. 3-22
MCA “ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT” FEATURE ....................................................... 3-25
Programming the MCA Alternate Current Limit Feature ......................................... 3-25
Setting the Alternate Current Limit Initial Capacity Limit .................................. 3-26
LMS OPERATING PROCEDURES
Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847) for LMS operating procedures.
Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
LMS LOCAL PORT
The LMS Local Port is provided via a USB to RS-232 Port Adapter Unit. The proper device driver must be installed on the computer to be connected to the USB port. Use one of the following procedures to install the device driver.
Installing the USB Device Driver from the Furnished CD
A device driver CD is supplied with the USB to RS-232 Port Adapter Unit. The proper driver must be installed on the computer to be connected to the USB port. Use the provided CD to install the driver.
Page 3-2 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Downloading the USB Driver from the Web
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
1) Go to this link http://vscom.de/downloadcenter.htm
.
2) Select “USB to Serial Drivers” from the Product Category drop-down menu.
3) Select your product model’s “Driver and Documentation” to download the files.
4) Select your computer ’s operating system.
5) Run or save the application.
Setting up your Computer to Access the Power System
1) Select Hyper terminal.
2) Connect using one of the unused COM ports. (e.g. COM 5)
3) Set Bit Per Second to 19200.
4) Set Data Bits to 8.
5) Set Parity to None.
6) Set Stop bits to 1.
7) Set Flow control to Hardware.
8) Select OK.
9) In Hyper terminal press ENTER.
10) Enter the password 6.
11) Enter “?” to see commands.
LOCAL CONTROLS AND INDICATORS
Location and Identification
Refer to the illustrations in Chapter 1. System Overview.
LMS Main/Expansion CPU Circuit Card
(if furnished) Controls and Indicators
Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847). Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Bay LED Indicator
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Located on the top front panel of each bay.
Green (steady)
Red (steady)
Yellow (flashing)
Bay is 'OK'
'Bay Failure'
Note: “Bay Failure” conditions for the Primary
Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays are set via the MCA Relay Function Channel #24
configuration.
Bay is being 'Identified' by MCA
Distribution Bus LED Indicator
Located next to each Distribution Bus (on the front of each MCA Distribution Bus
Monitoring circuit card hinged panel) in each bay.
Green (steady)
Red (steady)
Yellow (flashing)
Distribution Bus is 'OK'
'Distribution Bus Failure'
Distribution Bus is being 'Identified' by MCA
MCA Component LED Indicator
Each MCA component (i.e. Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card, Bay MCA/Router
Circuit Card, MCA Relay Circuit Card, MCA I/O Circuit Card) contains an LED Indicator.
Green (steady)
Red (steady)
Yellow (flashing)
Component is 'OK'
'Component Failure'
Component is being 'Identified' by MCA
Bay Monitoring and Control Section Indicators
Located in each Bay's Monitoring and Control Section (see illustrations in Chapter 1).
Power
FA
Illuminates Green when DC input power is being supplied to the Bay's 'Monitor and Control Section'.
Illuminates Red when any fuse on the Bay's 'Monitor and Control Section' opens (i.e. input fuses to Bay's
MCA/Router circuit card, Bay's LMS Main/Expansion
CPU circuit card, and Bay's Distribution Bus
Monitoring circuit cards).
Page 3-4 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA Controls and Indicators
Control / Indicator Description
FUNCTION SELECT UP
FUNCTION SELECT DOWN
(Arrow Pushbuttons)
Moves up and down, respectively, through the list of available entries in the currently displayed menu.
FUNCTION SET
ENTER /←/→
(Pushbutton)
Used to move to another menu, as determined by the currently displayed entry. Also used to lock the displayed setting or value of the currently selected menu entry, when in the adjustment or change setting mode.
Note: Pressing the ALARM CUTOFF pushbutton and the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton simultaneously, allows the User to enter the adjustment or change setting mode, to change the value or setting of the currently selected menu entry, if available.
FUNCTION SET YES (+) (i)
FUNCTION SET NO (-)
(Pushbuttons)
ALARM CUTOFF
(Pushbutton)
ALARM CUTOFF
(Indicator)
Used to increase or decrease the value of the currently selected menu entry when in the adjustment or change setting mode.
Note: Pressing the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously moves the user to the "Initial Message" display
(beginning).
Note: When in the adjustment or change setting mode, depressing the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton after the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt accepts the new value or setting, depressing the FUNCTION
SET NO (-) pushbutton after the "ARE YOU SURE?" prompt cancels the adjustment or change setting mode without making any changes.
Note: You can view additional information when the MCA displays the "i" symbol by pressing this key.
Silences the audible alarm. Any new alarms will reactivate the audible alarm.
Note: Pressing the ALARM CUTOFF pushbutton and the FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbutton simultaneously, allows the user to enter the adjustment or change setting mode, to change the value or setting of the currently selected menu entry, if available.
Illuminates yellow when the MCA audible alarm has been silenced using the
ALARM CUTOFF Pushbutton.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MAJOR
(Indicator)
MINOR
(Indicator)
AC
(Indicator)
TEST/EQ
(Indicator)
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Flashes red if any condition listed below occurs.
AC fail on two or more Rectifiers.
Rectifier fail alarm activates on two or more Rectifiers.
Battery On Discharge alarm activates.
Very Low Voltage alarm activates.
High Voltage Alarm 1 activates.
High Voltage Alarm 2 activates.
Emergency Stop or Remote HVS activated.
If any system distribution fuse or circuit breaker opens.
Any High or Low Temperature Alarm activates.
Any Router, Distribution, MCA Relay, or MCA I/O circuit card alarm activates.
Duplicate Rectifier, Router, Distribution, MCA Relay, or MCA I/O circuit card reference designation.
System component cannot be identified.
MCA Hardware/Software failure.
MCA Initializing.
Illuminates red if any condition listed below occurs.
Rectifier fail alarm activates on any single Rectifier.
If the over-current alarm activates.
Loss of communication to the display or LMS.
Illuminates green if AC input voltage to all Rectifiers is greater than the preset non-adjustable low AC input voltage inhibit, less than the preset nonadjustable high AC input voltage inhibit, and the Standby/Operate switch on each Rectifier is in the I "operate" position. Illuminates red if AC input voltage to any Rectifier decreases below or increases above the respective inhibit value.
Danger: In standby mode, AC input power IS connected to the Rectifier.
Illuminates yellow when the system is placed in the test/equalize mode, locally or remotely.
MCA Display
Refer to Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA for MCA Display descriptions.
Surge Suppression Alarms
(available only if a Surge Suppression Option is furnished)
If a surge suppression assembly operates, the MCA displays a "Binary Input Customer
Text Message" in the I/O Board Alarm Detail Message. If you wish to change the default message, refer to the " SETTING MCA CUSTOM TEXT MESSAGES " in this chapter.
"MCA Customer Alarm Relays" may also be programmed to provide an external alarm.
Note that a Surge Suppression Alarm is active when there is NO AC power, and resets when AC power is supplied.
Page 3-6 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Rectifier Controls and Indicators
208V and 480V Input Rectifiers
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Control / Indicator
Operate / Standby Switch
AC / Identify Indicator
Protection Alarm Indicator
Fail Alarm Indicator
OUTPUT CURRENT
Bargraph
Description
This two positions rocker switch provides the following functions.
I (Operate): Enables the Rectifier to provide output power.
(Standby): Inhibits Rectifier output.
Note: In standby mode, AC input power remains connected to the Rectifier.
This LED operates as follows.
Steady green indicates AC input voltage to the
Rectifier is within the specified operating range and the Operate/Standby switch is in the 'Operate' position.
Blinking green indicates the Rectifier is being
'Identified' by MCA.
This LED operates as follows.
Steady YELLOW indicates.
AC input under/over voltage.
Rectifier PFC output under/over voltage.
High temperature.
Current sharing imbalance.
Blinking YELLOW indicates:
Rectifier communication failure.
This LED operates as follows.
Steady RED indicates.
Output over-voltage.
Output fuse blown.
Rectifier ID fault.
Blinking red indicates:
Faulty fan.
Shows the Rectifier's output current.
Each LED segment represents 20A. If the rectifier is in current limit (output current > 200A), the tenth LED blinks.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
EXTERNAL ALARMS
MCA Customer Alarm Relay circuit cards may be installed. These alarm relays are mapped to the MCA alarms per the MCA configuration. See the table in Section 5876
(Installation Instructions) for the MCA default configuration. Another table is provided in
Section 5876 (Installation Instructions) to document a custom configuration.
STARTING AND STOPPING SYSTEM OPERATION
Rectifier Normal Starting Procedure
Place the Rectifier Standby/Operate switch in the I "operate" position.
Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Local)
Complete Shutdown
1) Place the Rectifier Standby/Operate switch in the "standby" position.
Local TR Shutdown
Note: When a Rectifier is shut down via the Local TR Shutdown feature, it must be manually restarted. The Local TR Shutdown feature DOES NOT automatically restart Rectifiers to deliver current in any operational or alarm state of the DC plant. The Rectifier must be manually restarted by navigating the MCA and selecting to turn the Rectifier back ON as detailed in the following procedure.
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"TURN PCU ON OR OFF" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER key.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT UP or DOWN arrow key until the Rectifier to be stopped using the local TR feature is displayed.
4) With this Rectifier being displayed, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and
FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
5) "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
6) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
7) Repeat this procedure to restart the Rectifier.
Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Remote) (if optional LMS installed)
Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847). Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Page 3-8 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
RESTARTING PROCEDURES WHEN RECTIFIER IS
AUTOMATICALLY OR MANUALLY INHIBITED, SHUT DOWN, OR
LOCKED OUT
Rectifier High Voltage Shutdown Lockout
Place the Standby/Operate switch to the "standby" position, and then back to the I
"operate" position.
Rectifier Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect
Remove the emergency shutdown and fire alarm disconnect signal, and on each Rectifier place the Standby/Operate switch to the "standby" position and then back to the I
"operate" position.
Remote On/Off (TR)
Remove the remote on/off (TR) signal from the respective Rectifier. The signal can originate from the LMS (if installed), or via the local MCA Control Panel.
OUTPUT VOLTAGE MODE OF OPERATION SELECTION
Placing the System into the Float Mode of Operation
Manually place the system into float mode by navigating to and activating the "TEST/EQ
MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" menu item in the MCA function menu. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
Note: In the following step, if "FLOAT MODE IS ACTIVE. SET TEST/EQ?" is displayed, the system is already operating in the float mode. In this case, DO
NOT perform steps 2) through 4), proceed with step 5).
2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display
"TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?".
3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
4) "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-9
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Placing the System into the Test/Equalize Mode of Operation
Warning: Do not supply equalize output voltage for a longer period than necessary. Prolonged higher battery charge voltage overcharges the battery cells and reduces battery life.
Note: Test/Equalize Mode requires Power Share to be turned off.
There are four methods of placing the system from the float mode to the test/equalize mode.
Method 1 (Manual Test/Equalize) Procedure
In this method, a user manually places the system into the test/equalize mode via the
MCA Control Panel. A user must manually return the system to the float mode via the
MCA Control Panel. Follow the procedures described below.
Setting for Manual Test/Equalize: Set the "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" menu item in the MCA configure menu to below 0. The display changes to
"TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS MANUAL" to indicate manual test/equalize mode is set. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display
"MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" or "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS
MANUAL" is displayed.
Note: If "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS MANUAL" is displayed, the system is already set for manual test/equalize. In this case, proceed with step 8).
Note: If "END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" is displayed, the system is set for manually initiated timed test/equalize, and a timed test/equalize is in progress. In this case, you can proceed with steps 4) through 7) to cancel the timed test/equalize in progress and change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) to proceed with the timed test/equalize in progress and make no changes.
4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
5) Press the FUNCTION SET NO / - key to scroll the displayed value towards 0.
Release the key when "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS MANUAL" is displayed. This indicates the manually initiated timed test/equalize feature is disabled and the system must be manually returned to the float mode if placed in the test/equalize mode.
6) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Page 3-10 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode: Manually place the system into test/equalize mode by navigating to and activating the "FLOAT MODE IS ACTIVE. SET
TEST/EQ?" menu item in the MCA function menu. The system is placed in the test/equalize mode and must be manually placed back to the float mode. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
Note: In the following step, if "TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" is displayed, the system is already operating in the test/equalize mode. In this case, DO NOT perform steps 2) through 4), proceed with step 5).
2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display "FLOAT
MODE IS ACTIVE. SET TEST/EQ?".
3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
4) "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Returning to Float Mode: To return to float mode, navigate to and activate the
"TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" menu item in the MCA function menu, as previously described in this chapter.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-11
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Method 2 (Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize) Procedure
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
In this method, a user manually places the system into the test/equalize mode via the
MCA Control Panel. The system automatically returns to the float mode after a preset programmable time period (1-99 hours, in increments of one hour). Follow the procedures described below.
Setting for Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize: Set the "MANUAL
TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" menu item in the MCA configure menu to a value between 1 and 99. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display
"MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" or "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS
MANUAL" is displayed.
Note: If "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" is displayed, the system is already set for manually initiated timed test/equalize. In this case, you can proceed with steps 4) through 7) to change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) if no changes are required.
Note: If "END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" is displayed, the system is already set for manually initiated timed test/equalize, and a timed test/equalize is in progress. In this case, you can proceed with steps 4) through 7) to cancel the timed test/equalize in progress and change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) to proceed with the timed test/equalize in progress and make no changes.
4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
5) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or FUNCTION SET NO (-) key until the desired value is displayed, then release the key. Note that as you scroll BELOW
0, "TEST/EQUALIZE STOP IS MANUAL" is displayed. Scroll back up to redisplay "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE =".
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode: Manually place the system into test/equalize mode by navigating to and activating the "FLOAT MODE ACTIVE. SET
TEST/EQ?" menu item in the MCA function menu. The system is placed in the test/equalize mode for the time period set in "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS".
The system automatically returns to the float mode when this time period expires. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.
Page 3-12 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
Note: In the following step, if "TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" is displayed, the system is already operating in the test/equalize mode. In this case, DO NOT perform steps 2) through 4), proceed with step 5).
2) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display "FLOAT
MODE IS ACTIVE. SET TEST/EQ?".
3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
4) "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Returning to Float Mode: The system automatically returns to float mode when the
"timed test/equalize period" expires.
Note: Navigating to "END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" of the MCA configure menu displays the hours remaining in the timed test/equalize period.
Note: Timed test/equalize is canceled and the system is placed in the float mode if any of the following occurs.
1) Manually placing the system in the float mode by navigating to and activating
"TEST/EQ MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" menu item in the MCA function menu, as previously described in this chapter.
2) Resetting the "MANUAL TEST/EQUALIZE = hh HOURS" value in the MCA configure menu when "END TEST/EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" is being displayed, as described in the previous procedure
3) Applying an external test/equalize signal as described in the next procedure.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-13
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Method 3 (Automatic Test/Equalize) Procedure
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
In this method, a user enables the Automatic Equalize feature via the MCA Control
Panel. The system is automatically placed in the equalize mode and automatically returns to float mode for the conditions as described above. Follow the procedures described below.
Note: The automatic equalize feature is intended for use only with wet cell batteries.
Using this feature with valve regulated batteries is not recommended.
Description
This feature can be enabled or disabled by a user via the MCA. The default state is disabled.
The Automatic Equalize feature is a time based function which is controlled by a customer selectable multiplier and by the "System Battery is on Discharge" alarm setpoint. The MCA’s default setting is for a multiplier of zero, which disables the
Automatic Equalize feature.
When the Automatic Equalize feature is enabled, if system voltage drops to less than the
"System Battery is on Discharge" alarm setpoint, the MCA initiates a timing cycle to measure the discharge time period. The MCA requires at least 15 minutes of continuous
"System Battery is on Discharge" alarm in order to prevent nuisance equalization cycles.
When system voltage rises to above the "System Battery is on Discharge" alarm setpoint, the MCA ends the discharge timing cycle and (assuming a minimum of 15 minutes has elapsed) places the Rectifiers into the equalize mode for a customer selectable multiple of the discharge time period (the discharge time period includes the initial 15 minutes).
The equalize time period can be set for 0 to 15 times the discharge time period, up to a maximum of 300 hours. A zero (0) setting disables the feature.
When the Automatic Equalize feature is enabled, the MCA prevents a user from setting the equalize value lower than the float setpoint. If the equalize value is set first, the MCA automatically sets the Automatic Equalize Multiplier to zero (0), disabling the feature.
Manually setting the system to float or equalize mode cancels the automatic function, if active.
Note: Equalization is only effective if the correct multiplier is entered to allow the battery to charge to capacity. It makes no sense to end the equalize cycle before battery capacity has been restored. To determine the multiplier, load current and system capacity must be known. For example, consider a system with 200 amps of
Rectifier capacity and 150 amps of load. If there is a 2-hour outage of AC power,
300 amp-hours (150 x 2) will be drained from the battery. When AC power is restored, the battery charge current will be 50 amps (200-150), and it will take at least 6 hours (300/50) to replace the battery capacity. In this scenario, the multiplier must be set greater than 3 for the Automatic Equalize feature to have any effect.
Enabling and Disabling the Automatic Equalize Feature: To enable, set the "AUTO
EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" menu item in the MCA Configure Menu to a value between 0 and 15. To disable, set the "AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" menu item in the MCA Configure Menu to 0. A step-by-step procedure is provided next.
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press
Page 3-14 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" or "AUTO EQUALIZE IS
DISABLED" is displayed.
Note: If "AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" is displayed, the system is already set for Automatic Equalize. In this case, you can proceed with steps
4) through 7) to change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) if no changes are required.
Note: If "END AUTO EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" is displayed, the system is already set for Automatic Equalize, and an Automatic Equalize is in progress.
In this case, you can proceed with steps 4) through 7) to cancel the Automatic
Equalize in progress and change the current setting, or proceed with step 8) to proceed with the Automatic Equalize in progress and make no changes.
4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
5) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or FUNCTION SET NO (-) key until the desired value is displayed, then release the key. Note that as you scroll below 1,
"AUTO EQUALIZE IS DISABLED" is displayed. Scroll back up to redisplay
"AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ##".
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode: The MCA automatically does this for the conditions as previously described.
Returning to Float Mode: The MCA automatically does this for the conditions as previously described.
Note: Navigating to "END AUTO EQUALIZE IN hhh.hh HOURS" of the MCA Configure
Menu displays the hours remaining in an automatic equalize period, if active.
Note: Auto Equalize is canceled and the system is placed in the float mode if any of the following occurs.
1) Manually placing the system in the float mode by navigating to and activating
"TEST/EQUALIZE MODE ACTIVE. SET FLOAT?" menu item in the MCA
Function Menu.
2) Resetting the "AUTO EQUALIZE FOR ## x DISCHARGE" value in the MCA
Configure Menu when "END AUTO hhh.hh HR" is being displayed, as described in the previous procedure
3) Applying an external test/equalize signal.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-15
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Method 4 (External Test/Equalize) Procedure
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
In this method, a user (or external equipment) places the system in the test/equalize mode by applying an external signal to the system. The system returns to the float mode when the external signal is removed. This method overrides the other three methods.
Placing the System into Test/Equalize Mode: Apply an external test/equalize loop closure to the system's remote equalize terminals.
Returning to Float Mode: Remove the external test/equalize loop closure from the system's remote equalize terminals.
Note: If a manual test/equalize, manually initiated timed test/equalize ,or automatic equalize is in process; it is canceled and the system returns to float mode when system ground is removed from the test/equalize terminal.
Page 3-16 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
SETTING MCA AUDIBLE ALARM CUTOFF RESET TIME PERIOD
An audible alarm device is located on the MCA Control Panel. This alarm sounds when any alarm condition monitored by the MCA occurs. The alarm can be manually silenced
(cut off) by pressing a local key. A local indicator illuminates when the audible alarm has been cut off. The alarm remains silenced for the current alarm condition only. If another alarm condition occurs, the audible alarm again sounds.
A programmable audible alarm cutoff reset feature is provided. Once an audible alarm has been cut off, it automatically resets (and sounds if the alarm condition is still present) after the time period programmed expires. If another alarm condition occurs, the audible alarm again sounds.
The MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset feature is active when an "AUDIBLE SILENT TIME
= mm MINUTES" value is selected.
The MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset feature is inactive when "AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY
SILENCED" is selected.
Procedure
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
3) "AUDIBLE SILENT TIME = mm MINUTES" or "AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY
SILENCED" is displayed.
4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
5) Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or
NO (-) key until the desired value or "AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY SILENCED" is displayed. Release the key.
6) With the desired value or "AUDIBLE ALARMS STAY SILENCED" being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The audible alarm cutoff reset time period will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
8) To return to the beginning of the MCA Logic Tree, press and release the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-17
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
SETTING RECTIFIER SEQUENCING DELAY TIME PERIOD
The MCA can be set to provide Rectifier Sequencing. When the MCA senses an “AC
POWER IS OFF TO All PCU s” alarm, it turns off all Rectifiers. When the “AC POWER IS
OFF TO ALL PCU s” alarm clears, the MCA turns on Rectifier #1, then turns on the other
Rectifiers starting with Rectifier #2 every n seconds (n is user programmable from 1 to 20 seconds). If the MCA fails or the communication link is broken during a Rectifier
Sequencing routine, all Rectifiers turn on immediately.
The time delay between turning individual Rectifiers on is adjustable from 1 to 20 seconds, or you can set the feature to be disabled. Refer to the following procedure.
Procedure
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until "PCU
SEQUENCE DELAY = ss SECONDS" or "PCU SEQUENCING IS DISABLED" is displayed.
4) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
5) Observe the value displayed. Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or
NO (-) key until the desired value or "PCU SEQUENCING IS DISABLED" is displayed. Release the key.
6) With the desired value or "PCU SEQUENCING IS DISABLED" being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The Rectifier sequencing feature will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
8) To return to the beginning of the MCA Logic Tree, press and release the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously.
Page 3-18 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
SETTING MCA CUSTOM TEXT MESSAGES (NAMES)
You can set a custom text message (name) to be displayed for the following MCA items…
MCA, Router (Bay), Rectifier, Distribution Bus, Individual Distribution Points, MCA
Customer Alarm Relay Cards, Individual MCA Relays, MCA I/O Card Binary Alarms.
Whenever the MCA is displaying specific information pertaining to a specific MCA item, an i (information available) is also displayed on the fourth line. Pressing the FUNCTION
SET YES (+) (i) key toggles the name of the displayed MCA item between the normal
MCA naming convention and a custom test message (if set).
To enter or change a custom text message, perform the following procedure.
Procedure
1) Navigate to an MCA menu item that displays information about the particular
MCA item you want to set a custom text message for. Note that the i is displayed on the fourth line.
2) Press the FUNCTION SET YES (+) (i) key to display the text message.
3) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
4) An underline appears below the first character. Repeatedly, press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) keys to enter the desired character.
5) Press the FUNCTION SET ENTER key to lock the character and to move to the next character.
6) You can enter up to 32 characters for the custom text message in this fashion. If the custom text message contains less then 32 characters, simply repeatedly press the FUNCTION SET ENTER key until you exit the text change mode.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-19
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MAPPING LMS LED CHANNELS TO THE MCA
DISPLAY AND MCA CUSTOMER ALARM RELAYS
You can set the MCA to display a message if an LMS LED channel activates. You can then map an MCA Customer Alarm Relay to also activate.
Procedure
1) Map the LMS LED Channel to one of the MCA Relay Function Channels by adding the Monitoring LED * Message condition to the MCA Relay Function
Channel definition. Refer to Setting and Testing MCA Customer Alarm Relays in
Chapter 5 of the separate INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Section 5876) for a procedure. (Note that if you add the LMS LED Channel condition to the default
MCA Relay Function Channel #1, the condition will be mapped and displayed as an MCA Major Alarm condition. Note that if you add the LMS LED Channel condition to the default MCA Relay Function Channel #2, the condition will be mapped and displayed as an MCA Minor Alarm condition. Note that if you add the LMS LED Channel condition to any other MCA Relay Function Channel, the condition will be mapped and displayed as an MCA Info condition.)
2) Now you can map an MCA Customer Alarm Relay to activate when the LMS LED
Channel activates by assigning the MCA Relay Function Channel defined above to a particular MCA Relay. Refer to Setting and Testing MCA Customer Alarm
Relays in "Chapter 5. Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the System" in the separate INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS (Section 5876) for a procedure.
USING THE ALARM RELAY TEST FEATURE
Refer to Setting and Testing MCA Customer Alarm Relays in "Chapter 5. Installing the
Rectifiers and Initially Starting the System" in the separate INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS (Section 5876).
Page 3-20 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA “POWER SHARE” FEATURE
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Description
The MCA Power Share feature allows you to connect a Spec. No. 582140000 Power
S ystem (referred to as “New Power System” in this document) to an existing DC power system (referred to as “Existing Power System” in this document) instead of extending or completely replacing the Existing Power System.
The MCA Power Share feature provides for the sharing of the total load in a controlled manner.
When Power Share is programmed, the MCA in the New Power System adjusts Rectifier output voltage per load demands to ensure proper sharing between the New and Existing
Power Systems.
Operating Modes
Depending on the systems’ configurations, their Rectifier capacities, their distribution load capacities, and the Power Share configuration; four operating modes can occur.
Low Load Operation
When the total load current demand is lower than the programmed percentage value of the total capacity of the New Power System that will initially feed the load (PS Initial
Capacity Limit), the New Power System voltage will be increased by the programmed
PS Voltage Offset forcing the New Power System to carry the load. Make sure that the output voltage does not exceed the battery float range recommended by the manufacturer. In this operating mode, no current will be delivered by the Existing Power
System.
Normal Load Operation
When the total load current demand reaches the PS Initial Capacity Limit, the New
Power System output voltage will be decreased by the PS Voltage Offset, allowing the
Existing Power System to deliver the remaining current up to the New Power System’s maximum capacity. Both New and Existing Power Systems are now providing current to the load.
High Load Operation
When the total load current demand exceeds the sum of the maximum capacity of the
Existing Power System and the PS Initial Capacity Limit of the New Power System, the
New Power System will deliver the remaining current up to the maximum of its capacity.
The two systems will then reach their maximum capacities. This operation may occur when the batteries are being recharged, after a commercial AC failure for example.
Overload Operation
When the total load current demand is higher than the sum of the maximum capacity of the Existing Power System and the maximum capacity of the New Power System, both
Existing and New Power Systems and the batteries will feed the load. The output voltage will depend on the conditions of the batteries. This operation occurs if the total capacity of the PCUs (rectifiers) is too low in relation to the need for increased current.
Requirements and Conditions
The two DC power systems must be connected in parallel as described in the Installation
Instructions (Section 5776).
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-21
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Programming the MCA Power Share Feature in the New Power System
After a New Power System has been connected to an Existing Power System and both systems set for the same float voltage, you will have to configure the Power Share parameters in the MCA of the New Power System.
Note: The “Power Share” feature is not compatible with the temperature compensation feature. If temperature compensation is programmed ON, then “Turn Off
Temperatur e Compensation” is displayed in the Power Share menu. If Power
Share is programmed ON, then “Turn Off Power Share” is displayed in the temperature compensation menu.
Note: The Rectifier current limit menu item setting is ignored when Power Share is enable d. When Power Share is enabled, the message “PCU Current Limit Power
Share” is displayed in the PCU Current Limit menu.
Enabling Power Share
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"POWER SHARE IS OFF, TURN IT ON?" is displayed.
Note: If “TURN OFF TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION” is displayed, the MCA is set for temperature compensation. Disable temperature compensation and then return to this procedure.
5) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously. "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) key.
6) Continue with the next procedure.
Setting the Power Share Initial Capacity Limit
1) From the previous procedure, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
DOWN arrow key to display "PS INITIAL CAPACITY LIMIT = ##%".
2) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
3) Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key to change this setting as required. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: Enter the percentage value of the total capacity of the New Power System that will initially feed the load. This value must be set to ensure that the current delivered by the New Power System is lower than the total load current from the existing and New Power Systems.
(Adjustable from 20% to 90%, factory set at 80%.)
Page 3-22 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
4) With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER key.
5) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
6) Continue with the next procedure.
Setting the Power Share Voltage Offset
1) From the previous procedure, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
DOWN arrow key to display "PS VOLTAGE OFFSET = v.vV".
2) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
3) Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key to change this setting as required. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: Enter the value that will be added to the float voltage to ensure the New
Power System will initially carry the load. This value must be higher than the sum of the voltage drop in the cables connecting the two systems in parallel and the output voltage regulation specific to the rectifiers of the
Existing Power System. If the sense leads are connected to the same sensing points as the Existing Power System, the Voltage Offset should take into consideration the output voltage regulation only.
(Adjustable from 0.1V to 1.0V, factory set at 0.1V.)
4) With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER key.
5) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
6) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Verifying the Operation of the Power Share Feature
After programming the “Power Share” feature, verify its operation as follows. a) In a Power Share application where the New Power System is taking all of the load and the rectifiers in the Existing Power System are all in the standby mode, use an external dry load bank of sufficient capacity to increase the load on the
New Power System over the “PS Initial Capacity Limit”.
1) Verify that the New Power System limits the total output of its (PCUs) rectifiers to the current equivalent to this programmed percentage.
2) Verify that the New Power System lowers its output voltage by the value of the programmed “PS Voltage Offset”.
3) Verify that the rectifiers in the Existing Power System take the additional load as the load increases pass the “PS Initial Capacity Limit”.
4) Further increase the load in order to exceed the total capacity of the rectifiers in the Existing Power System (or shut down some of the rectifiers in the
Existing Power System if the capacity of the external dry load bank is not sufficient). Verify that the New Power System starts taking the additional load as soon as the total capacity of the rectifiers in the Existing Power
System is exceeded.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-23
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B b) In a Power Share application where the New Power System is taking only part of the load (operating continuously at the current level equivalent to the programmed “PS Initial Capacity Limit” percentage) and the rectifiers in the
Existing Power System are taking the rest of the load, use an external dry load bank of sufficient capacity to increase the load in order to exceed the total capacity of the rectifiers in the Existing Power System (or shut down some of the rectifiers in the Existing Power System if the capacity of the external dry load bank is not sufficient).
)
1) Verify that the New Power System starts taking the additional load as soon as the total capacity of the rectifiers in the Existing Power System is exceeded.
Page 3-24 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA “ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT” FEATURE
Description
The MCA Alternate Current Limit feature provides the means to automatically change the current limit operation of power system’s rectifiers (PCUs) when an external event/condition occurs.
Operating Modes
Normal Current Limit Operation
When the signal connected to the “Alternate Current Limit Input” is inactive, the system’s
PCUs curren t limiting feature operates at the value based on the “PCU Current Limit” parameter setting.
Alternate Current Limit Operation
When the signal connected to the “Alternate Current Limit Input” is active, the system’s
PCUs current limiting feature operates a t the value based on the “Alternate Current Limit
Capacity” parameter setting.
Requirements and Conditions
The system must have an MCA I/O circuit card installed.
Binary input #4 must be connected to a signal that will indicate to the MCA to place the rect ifiers into the “Alternate Current Limit” mode.
Programming the MCA Alternate Current Limit Feature
When the Alternate Current Limit is first enabled, the “Alternate Current Limit Capacity” parameter defaults to a value of 100% of available capacity.
Note: The “Alternate Current Limit” feature is not compatible with the Power Share feature. If Power Share is programmed ON, then “Turn Off Power Share” is displayed in the Alternate Current Limit menu.
Note: The PCU current limit menu item setting is ignored when Alternate Current Limit is enabled AND the Alternate Current Limit Input is active. When this occurs, the message “ALT. LIMIT” is displayed in the PCU Current Limit menu.
Enabling Alternate Current Limit
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ALT. LIMIT IS OFF, TURN IT ON?" is displayed.
5) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously. "ARE YOU SURE?" is displayed. Press and release the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) key.
Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures Page 3-25
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
6) Continue with the next procedure.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Setting the Alternate Current Limit Initial Capacity Limit
1) From the previous procedure, press and release the FUNCTION SELECT
DOWN arrow key to display "ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT = ##%".
2) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
3) Press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key to change this setting as required. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: Enter the percentage value of the total PCU output capacity at which the system will c urrent limit when the “Alternate Current Limit Input” becomes active.
(Adjustable from 10% to 110%, factory set at 100%.)
4) With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER key.
5) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
6) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 3-26 Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CHAPTER 4
MCA SYSTEM ADJUSTMENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Adjusting Battery Ambient High Temperature #1 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital
Adjusting Battery Ambient High Temperature #2 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital
Adjusting Battery Ambient Low Temperature #1 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital
Adjusting Battery Ambient Low Temperature #2 Alarm (if Battery Charge Digital
Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Slope ....................... 4-18
Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Maximum
Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Minimum Voltage ..... 4-20
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADJUSTMENT LOCATION AND IDENTIFICATION
All system alarm and control circuits intended for customer adjustment are accessible via the MCA Control Panel. Unless otherwise stated, these circuits have been factory set to the values listed in the System Application Guide. If readjustment is necessary, perform the appropriate adjustment procedure detailed below.
These adjustments can also be done remotely via the LMS (if furnished). To adjust the system via the optional LMS system, refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847).
Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Refer to the illustrations in Chapter 1. System Overview for local adjustment controls locations.
Page 4-2 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADJUSTING FLOAT OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. "FLOAT SETPOINT = vv.vvV" is displayed.
5) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
6) Observe the value displayed. This is the float voltage setting for all Rectifiers. If the system is used with a battery charge digital temperature compensation probe, this value is the float voltage setting at 25°C. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: The float voltage value is prevented from being adjusted higher than 1V below the high voltage shutdown setting. When used with a Battery
Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe, float voltage is prevented from being adjusted higher than the Maximum Voltage with
Temperature Compensation setting, or lower than the Minimum Voltage with Temperature Compensation setting.
7) With the desired float voltage value being displayed, press and release the
FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
8) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The Rectifiers will assume the new value at their prevailing load current.
Note: The float voltage will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
9) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADJUSTING TEST/EQUALIZE OUTPUT VOLTAGE
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display
"TEST/EQUALIZE = vv.vvV".
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the test/equalize voltage setting for all
Rectifiers. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or
NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: The test/equalize voltage value is prevented from being adjusted higher than 1V below the high voltage shutdown setting. When used with a
Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe, test/equalize voltage is prevented from being adjusted higher than the Maximum
Voltage with Temperature Compensation setting, or lower than the
Minimum Voltage with Temperature Compensation setting.
8) With the desired test/equalize voltage value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The Rectifiers will assume the new value at their prevailing load current.
Note: The test/equalize voltage will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 4-4 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADJUSTING HIGH VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"HI VOLTAGE SHUTDOWN = vv.vvV" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high voltage shutdown setting for all
Rectifiers. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or
NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: The system will not allow a value higher than 59.5 to be entered. Also, the high voltage shutdown value is prevented from being adjusted lower than 1V above the higher of the float or test/equalize setting. When used with a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe, high voltage shutdown is prevented from being adjusted lower than 1V above the Maximum Voltage with Temperature Compensation setting.
8) With the desired high voltage shutdown value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The high voltage shutdown value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADJUSTING RECTIFIER CURRENT LIMIT
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE SYSTEM VOLTS & AMPS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"PCU CURRENT LIMIT = aaaaaA" or "PCU CURRENT LIMIT = aaaaaMAX" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the system current limit setting. Each
Rectifier ’s current limit circuit will be automatically adjusted to ensure that system current does not exceed this value. To change this value, press and hold the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: PCU current limit = aaaaaMAX indicates system current limit is set to the sum of the maximum current capacities of all Rectifier Modules installed in the system.
8) With the desired current limiting value being displayed, press and release the
FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The system current limit value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 4-6 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADJUSTING SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE ALARM 1
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) "SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #1 = vv.vvV" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high voltage alarm 1 setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired high voltage alarm 1 value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The high voltage alarm 1 value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADJUSTING SYSTEM HIGH VOLTAGE ALARM 2
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display
"SYSTEM HI VOLTAGE #2 = vv.vvV".
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high voltage alarm 2 setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired high voltage alarm 2 value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The high voltage alarm 2 value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 4-8 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADJUSTING SYSTEM BATTERY ON DISCHARGE ALARM
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"BATTERY ON DISCHARGE = vv.vvV" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the battery on discharge alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired battery on discharge alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The battery on discharge value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-9
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADJUSTING SYSTEM VERY LOW VOLTAGE ALARM
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"VERY LOW VOLTAGE = vv.vvV" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the very low voltage alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired very low voltage alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The very low voltage alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 4-10 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADJUSTING TOTAL DISTRIBUTION LOAD ALARM
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"TOTAL DISTRIBUTION = aaaaaA" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the system current alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired system current alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The system current alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 1 0 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-11
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADJUSTING DISTRIBUTION GROUP A LOAD ALARM
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"DISTRIBUTION GROUP A = aaaaaA" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Group A Load Current alarm setting.
To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired Group A Load Current alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The Group A Load Current alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 4-12 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADJUSTING DISTRIBUTION GROUP B LOAD ALARM
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"DISTRIBUTION GROUP B = aaaaaA" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Group B Load Current alarm setting.
To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired Group B Load Current alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The Group B Load Current alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-13
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADJUSTING BATTERY AMBIENT HIGH TEMPERATURE #1
ALARM (IF BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION PROBE IS INSTALLED)
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"NO HIGH TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM” or “HIGH TEMPERATURE #1 = ttt C/F" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high temperature #1 alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired high temperature #1 alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The high temperature #1 alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 4-14 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADJUSTING BATTERY AMBIENT HIGH TEMPERATURE #2
ALARM (IF BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION PROBE IS INSTALLED)
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"NO HIGH TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM” or “HIGH TEMPERATURE #2 = ttt C/F" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the high temperature #2 alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired high temperature #2 alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The high temperature #2 alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-15
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADJUSTING BATTERY AMBIENT LOW TEMPERATURE #1
ALARM (IF BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION PROBE IS INSTALLED)
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"NO LOW TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM” or “LOW TEMPERATURE #1 = ttt C/F" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the low temperature #1 alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired low temperature #1 alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The low temperature #1 alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed withi n 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 4-16 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADJUSTING BATTERY AMBIENT LOW TEMPERATURE #2
ALARM (IF BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION PROBE IS INSTALLED)
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"ADJUST THE ALARM SETPOINTS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"NO LOW TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM” or “LOW TEMPERATURE #2 = ttt C/F" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the low temperature #2 alarm setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key.
Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired low temperature #2 alarm value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The low temperature #2 alarm value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-17
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
CONFIGURING BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION SLOPE
Note: The Temperature Compensation feature requires Power Share to be turned off.
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"NO TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION” or “TEMPERATURE SLOPE =
0.vvvV C/F" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation slope setting. To change this value, press and hold the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: Refer to Battery and Equipment Manufacturers’ recommendations or site requirements for the value. Note that this is the compensation for the entire battery string, not per battery cell.
8) With the desired slope value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION
SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The slope value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 4-18 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CONFIGURING BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION MAXIMUM VOLTAGE
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"MAXIMUM COMPENSATION = vv.vvV" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation maximum voltage setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: Refer to Battery and Equipment Manufacturers’ recommendations or site requirements for the value.
Note: Maximum Voltage with Temperature Compensation is prevented from being adjusted higher than 1.0V below the High Voltage Shutdown setting, or lower than the float voltage setting.
8) With the desired maximum voltage with temperature compensation value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The maximum voltage with temperature compensation value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-19
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
CONFIGURING BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION MINIMUM VOLTAGE
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"MINIMUM COMPENSATION = vv.vvV" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation minimum voltage setting. To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
Note: Refer to Battery and Equipment Manufacturers’ recommendations or site requirements for the value.
8) With the desired minimum voltage with temperature compensation value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The minimum voltage with temperature compensation value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Page 4-20 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CONFIGURING DEGREE UNITS DISPLAYED ( F OR C)
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"NOW DISPLAYING (C or F) SET TO (F or C)" is displayed.
6) To toggle the degree units being displayed, press and release the ALARM
CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
7) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
Note: The minimum voltage with temperature compensation value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET
YES (+) key is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-21
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
CONFIGURING THE SYSTEM DATE AND TIME
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"IT IS NOW hh:mm:ss dd-mon-yy" is displayed.
6) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously. The day of the month is underlined.
7) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the day of month.
8) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key. Month is underlined.
9) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the month.
10) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key. Year is underlined.
11) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the year.
12) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key. Hour is underlined.
13) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the hour.
14) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key. Minutes is underlined.
15) Press FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys to change the minutes.
16) Press FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
Page 4-22 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CONFIGURING MCA I/O CIRCUIT CARD ANALOG INPUT(S)
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) CHANGE I/O BOARD PARAMETERS is displayed. Press and release the
FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
6) ANALOG INPUT B#-P# IS DISTRIBUTION or ANALOG INPUT B#-P# IS
AUXILIARY is displayed (B#-P# = Bay Number – MCA I/O Circuit Card Position
Number).
This setting determines if the monitored input appears in the MCA
DISTRIBUTION MEASUREMENT menus or in separate MCA AUXILIARY
MEASUREMENT menus.
To toggle the setting, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION
SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
“ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
To select another analog input (if available), press the FUNCTION SELECT
DOWN arrow key.
7) When the last MCA I/O circuit card with an analog input is selected, press the
FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key to display ANALOG INPUT B#-P# 50mV
= aaaaA (B#-P# = Bay Number – MCA I/O Circuit Card Position Number).
This sets the scale factor for the analog input.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
Observe the value displayed. To change this value, press and hold the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER key.
“ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
To select another analog input (if available), press the FUNCTION SELECT
DOWN arrow key.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-23
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013 Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802 NL B
8) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
)
Page 4-24 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CONFIGURING MCA I/O CIRCUIT CARD ANALOG OUTPUT(S)
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) CHANGE I/O BOARD PARAMETERS is displayed. Press and release the
FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
ANALOG OUTPUT B#-P# 50mV = aaaaA (B#-P# = Bay Number – MCA I/O
Circuit Card Position Number).
This sets the scale factor for the analog output.
Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
Observe the value displayed. To change this value, press and hold the
FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) key. Release the key when the desired value is displayed.
With the desired value being displayed, press and release the FUNCTION SET
ENTER key.
“ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
To select another analog output (if available), press the FUNCTION SELECT
DOWN arrow key.
7) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-25
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
CONFIGURING MCA I/O CIRCUIT CARD BINARY INPUT(S)
1) All controls are located on the MCA Interface Pad.
2) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
3) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"CHANGE CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS" is displayed.
4) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
5) CHANGE I/O BOARD PARAMETERS is displayed. Press and release the
FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
6) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
BINARY INPUT B#-P#-I# IS ALARM = CLOSED or BINARY INPUT B#-P#-I# IS
ALARM = OPEN is displayed (B#-P#-I# = Bay Number – MCA I/O Circuit Card
Position Number – Binary Input Number).
This setting determines the alarm state of the monitored binary input.
To toggle the setting press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION
SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
“ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
To select another binary input located on the card, press the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key. When the last binary input is selected, pressing the
FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key displays the next MCA I/O circuit card with binary inputs (if available).
7) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Note: If a binary input alarms, the MCA displays a "Binary Input Customer Text
Message" in the I/O Board Alarm Detail Message. If you wish to change
the default message, refer to 'Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures' for an adjustment procedure.
Page 4-26 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
MCA AUDIBLE ALARM CUTOFF RESET TIME PERIOD
Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.
MCA RECTIFIER SEQUENCING FEATURE
Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.
MANUALLY INITIATED TIMED TEST/EQUALIZE FEATURE
Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.
AUTOMATIC TEST/EQUALIZE FEATURE
Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.
MCA POWER SHARE FEATURE
Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.
ALARM RELAY TEST FEATURE
Refer to Setting and Testing MCA Customer Alarm Relays in "Chapter 5. Installing the
Rectifiers and Initially Starting the System" in the separate INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS (Section 5876).
MCA “ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT” FEATURE
Refer to Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures for an adjustment procedure.
Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments Page 4-27
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
This Page Intentionally Left Blank
Page 4-28 Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CHAPTER 5
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 5. System Maintenance Page 5-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADMONISHMENTS
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
General Safety
Danger: SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY
PROCEDURES.
Performing the following procedures may expose service personnel to hazards. These procedures should be performed by qualified service personnel familiar with the hazards associated with this type of equipment. These hazards may include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid these hazards: a) The tasks should be performed in the order indicated. b) Remove watches, rings, and other jewelry. c) Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or termination, use a voltmeter to verify that no voltage or the expected voltage is present. d) Wear eye protection, and use recommended tools. e) Use insulated tools.
(To avoid danger to the installer or damage to the equipment, the tools used in this procedure should have insulated grips. All exposed metal shafts, extensions, handles, etc. should be completely insulated with a minimum of three half-lapped layers of electrical tape. Ensure that wrenches with more than one working end have only one end exposed.)
Voltages
AC Input Voltages
Danger: This system operates from AC voltage capable of producing fatal electrical shock.
DC Input/Output Voltages
Danger: This system produces DC Power and requires battery to be connected to it. Although the DC voltage is not hazardously high, the rectifier modules and/or battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have any tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed wire connected to a battery terminal.
NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one termination at a time, or to simultaneously contact a termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short circuit can cause explosion and injury.
LMS MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847) for LMS maintenance procedures.
Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Page 5-2 Chapter 5. System Maintenance
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
The maintenance procedures listed in Table 5-1 should be performed and recorded at the recommended interval to ensure continual system operation.
The procedures listed in Table 5-2 may be performed and recorded at the recommended interval to track system operation. Table 5-2 procedures ARE NOT necessary for continual system operation. They are recommended only to provide a service record for the system.
The tables reference specific chapters in these User Instructions (Section 5877) or the separate Installation Instructions (Section 5876) that help in performing these procedures.
PROCEDURE REFERENCED IN COMPLETED (√)
Check Ventilation Openings for Obstructions such as Dust,
Papers, Manuals, etc.
--
Inspect and Tighten All
Installer's Connections
Section 5876,
Chapter 4.
Making Electrical
Connections.
Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.
Table 5-1
Maintenance Procedures to be Performed at 6-Month Intervals
Chapter 5. System Maintenance Page 5-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
PROCEDURE
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802
User Instructions
NLEB and 802
REFERENCED IN VALUE
Measure and Record
System Float
(Output) Voltage and
Compare MCA
Display Voltage with
Reference Meter
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #133) to Place in
Float Mode, if required.
Record System Output Voltage as Shown on the MCA Display.
Record also Reference Meter Voltage
Connected to System Output Busbars.
Measure and Record
System Test/Equalize
(Output) Voltage and
Compare MCA
Display Voltage with
Reference Meter
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #133) to Place in
Test/Equalize Mode.
Record System Output Voltage as Shown on the MCA Display.
Record also Reference Meter Voltage
Connected to System Output Busbars.
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #133) to Return to Float Mode.
Measure and Record
Total System Output
Current
Measure and Record
Total Rectifier Output
Current
Record System Output Current as Shown on the MCA Display.
Section 5877, Chapter 2
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #125).
Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.
Table 5-2 (cont’d on next page)
Procedures that MAY be Performed at 12-Month
Intervals to Track System Operation
NL B )
Page 5-4 Chapter 5. System Maintenance
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
PROCEDURE REFERENCED IN
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Rectifier VALUE
Measure and Record
Output Current of Each
Individual Rectifier
Section 5877,
Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #126).
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 1
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 2
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 3
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 4
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 5
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 6
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 7
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 8
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 9
Bay # (__),
Rectifier 10
Record Rectifier High
Voltage Shutdown Value
Record Rectifier Current
Limit Value
Section 5877,
Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #219).
Section 5877,
Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #221).
--
--
Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.
Table 52 (cont’d from previous page, cont'd on next page)
Procedures that MAY be Performed at 12-Month
Intervals to Track System Operation
Chapter 5. System Maintenance Page 5-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
PROCEDURE REFERENCED IN
Record System High
Voltage 1 Alarm Value or
Record and Check System
High Voltage 1 Alarm Value
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #226). or
Section 5876,
Chapter 5.
Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the
Power System.
Record System High
Voltage 2 Alarm Value or
Record and Check System
High Voltage 2 Alarm Value
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #227). or
Section 5876,
Chapter 5.
Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the
Power System.
Record System Battery On
Discharge Alarm Value or
Record and Check System
Battery On Discharge
Alarm Value
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #228). or
Section 5876,
Chapter 5.
Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the
Power System.
VALUE
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Record System Very Low
Voltage Alarm Value or
Record and Check System
Very Low Voltage Alarm
Value
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #229). or
Section 5876,
Chapter 5.
Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the
Power System.
Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.
Table 5-2 (cont'd from previous page, cont'd on next page)
Procedures that MAY be Performed at 12-Month
Intervals to Track System Operation
Page 5-6 Chapter 5. System Maintenance
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
PROCEDURE REFERENCED IN VALUE
Record System Total
Distribution Load Current
Alarm Value or
Record and Check Total
Distribution Load Current
Alarm Value
Record Distribution Group
A Load Current Alarm
Value or
Record and Check
Distribution Group A Load
Current Alarm Value
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #230). or
Section 5876,
Chapter 5.
Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the
Power System.
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #231). or
Section 5876,
Chapter 5.
Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the
Power System.
Record Distribution Group
B Load Current Alarm
Value or
Record and Check
Distribution Group B Load
Current Alarm Value
Section 5877, Chapter 2.
Navigating the MCA,
(Line #232). or
Section 5876,
Chapter 5.
Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the
Power System.
Note: This table may be reproduced as necessary to record and document system performance.
Table 5-2 (cont'd from previous page, cont'd on next page)
Procedures that MAY be Performed at 12-Month
Intervals to Track System Operation
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Chapter 5. System Maintenance Page 5-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
ADDING A RECTIFIER
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
To increase system current capacity, an additional Rectifier can easily be installed in an existing bay that contains an empty Rectifier mounting position. Follow the procedure detailed below. A Rectifier may be installed in a live system.
The Rectifier weighs approximately 40 lbs.
Rectifiers can be inserted or removed with power applied (hot swappable).
Procedure
1) Remove the blank panel from the Rectifier mounting position. Save this panel.
The panel must be re-installed if a Rectifier is removed.
2) Ensure that the Standby/Operate switch on the Rectifier to be installed is in the
"standby" position.
Note: In the next step, a safety latch is present on the left-hand (as viewed from the front) side panel of each Rectifier. The latch is designed to prevent the
Rectifier from inadvertently being removed completely from the Bay once it has been installed. It should not be necessary to depress the safety latch release when installing the Rectifier.
3) Install the Rectifier into the bay by sliding it evenly into its mounting position.
Secure the Rectifier to the bay by tightening the captive fasteners on the
Rectifier.
4) Place the Standby/Operate switch on the Rectifier installed to the I "operate" position.
5) The MCA automatically adds the capacity of the new Rectifier to the current limit and displays the new current limit setting.
6) If the current limit setting is correct, go to step 10). If the current limit setting is not correct, press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET
ENTER pushbuttons simultaneously.
7) Observe the value displayed. This is the system current limit setting. Reset this value to the new current limit setting. Each Rectifier ’s current limit circuit will be automatically adjusted to ensure that system current does not exceed this value.
To change this value, press and hold the FUNCTION SET YES (+) or NO (-) pushbutton. Release the pushbutton when the desired value is displayed.
8) With the desired current limiting value being displayed, press and release the
FUNCTION SET ENTER pushbutton.
9) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) pushbutton.
Note: The system current limit value will not be changed and the adjustment mode will be exited if the FUNCTION SET YES (+) pushbutton is not pressed within 10 seconds of the “ARE YOU SURE?” prompt.
10) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) pushbuttons simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
11) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms activated on the system.
Page 5-8 Chapter 5. System Maintenance
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
CHAPTER 6
SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING AND REPAIR
CONTACT INFORMATION
Support contact information is provided on the inside of the back cover of this document.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Rectifier Module Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting ........................................... 6-6
Updating the Inventory after Changes to the System Have Been Made .................. 6-7
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement........................................... 6-18
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Replacement ........................................ 6-21
Alarm, Reference, and Control Fuse Replacement ................................................ 6-22
Adding a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe to a
Removing a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe from a
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-1
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADMONISHMENTS
General Safety
Danger: SERVICE PERSONNEL MUST FOLLOW APPROVED SAFETY
PROCEDURES.
Performing the following procedures may expose service personnel to hazards. These procedures should be performed by qualified service personnel familiar with the hazards associated with this type of equipment. These hazards may include shock, energy, and/or burns. To avoid these hazards: a) The tasks should be performed in the order indicated. b) Remove watches, rings, and other jewelry. c) Prior to contacting any uninsulated surface or termination, use a voltmeter to verify that no voltage or the expected voltage is present. d) Wear eye protection, and use recommended tools. e) Use insulated tools.
(To avoid danger to the installer or damage to the equipment, the tools used in this procedure should have insulated grips. All exposed metal shafts, extensions, handles, etc. should be completely insulated with a minimum of three half-lapped layers of electrical tape. Ensure that wrenches with more than one working end have only one end exposed.)
Voltages
AC Input Voltages
Danger: This system operates from AC voltage capable of producing fatal electrical shock.
DC Input/Output Voltages
Danger: This system produces DC Power and requires battery to be connected to it. Although the DC voltage is not hazardously high, the rectifier Modules and/or battery can deliver large amounts of current. Exercise extreme caution not to inadvertently contact or have any tool inadvertently contact a battery terminal or exposed wire connected to a battery terminal.
NEVER allow a metal object, such as a tool, to contact more than one termination at a time, or to simultaneously contact a termination and a grounded object. Even a momentary short circuit can cause explosion and injury.
Caution: Performing the following procedures may interrupt power to the loads, if battery reserve is not sufficient.
Page 6-2 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Circuit Card Handling
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Warning: Installation or removal of the circuit cards requires careful handling.
Before handling any circuit card, read and follow the instructions contained on the Static Warning Page located at the beginning of this manual.
DC input power should always be removed from a circuit card before inserting or removing a circuit card.
To avoid possibility of circuit card damage from static discharge, a static wrist strap grounded through a one megohm resistor should always be worn when handling the circuit cards.
LMS TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURES
Refer to the LMS User Instructions (Section 5847) for LMS troubleshooting procedures.
Section 5847 can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-3
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION
General
This system is designed for ease in troubleshooting and repair. The various indicators, as described in Chapter 3. System Operating Procedures, are designed to isolate a failure to a specific element. Once the faulty element has been identified, refer to the next sections, “Replacement Information” and "Replacement Procedures".
The procedures listed in Chapter 5. System Maintenance, can also be used by servicing personnel in identification and/or prevention of trouble symptoms in the system.
Adjustments
If the suspected cause of a trouble symptom is an out of adjustment condition, that particular adjustment setting should be checked or reset using the appropriate adjustment procedure detailed in Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments. If a failed
Rectifier or circuit card is suspected, the adjustment procedures can also be used to verify the setpoints as well as the operation of the Rectifier or circuit card.
MCA Messages
An MCA Menu Tree (Section 5886) is provided in the separate INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided on the CD). Each line in the MCA
Menu Tree contains a number. This number is referenced in a chart provided in Chapter
2. Navigating the MCA. This chart provides a description of each line listed on the MCA
Menu Tree.
If the MCA displays an alarm message, find the line in the MCA Menu Tree showing this message. For an explanation of this alarm, locate the corresponding MCA Menu Tree
Line Number in the chart provided in Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA.
Note: If the MCA is replaced with an MCA previously used in another power system, the
MCA may reflect inventory items not in the current power system and may display alarms. In this case, update the inventory as detailed in this chapter. Also, if you remove an inventory item (a component) from the power system, you must update the inventory to clear alarms.
Note: If you remove a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe, alarms are displayed. Manually set the Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation feature to off as described in "Chapter 4. MCA System
Adjustments" to clear the alarms.
Page 6-4 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Rectifier Current Sharing Unbalance
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
When multiple rectifiers are operating in parallel and the current sharing unbalance among them is greater than 3%, check if the communications cables are correctly connected.
If the current sharing unbalance still persists, following the verification suggested above, then replace the rectifier which has had its current sharing function disabled.
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-5
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Rectifier Module Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting
The fault indicators that can be displayed by the rectifier are as follows: Power indicator
(green) off, Protection indicator (yellow) on, Protection indicator (yellow) flashing, Alarm indicator (red) on, and Alarm indicator (red) flashing. Refer to Table 6-1 for a list of possible causes and corrective actions.
Symptom Possible Cause(s) Suggested Action(s)
Power
Indicator
(Green) Off
No input voltage.
Input polarity reversed or input fuse blown.
Make sure there is input voltage.
Replace the fuse with a new one of the same capacity or reconnect the input power correctly.
Ensure that the AC input voltage is within the acceptable range.
AC input voltage outside the normal range.
PFC over-voltage. Replace the rectifier.
Protection
Indicator
(Yellow) On
Current sharing function is disabled.
Rectifier not inserted into the slot completely.
Replace the rectifier. nsert the rectifier again properly.
Rectifier over-temperature protection, which could be caused by:
1. Fan blocked.
2. Ventilation blocked (inlet or outlet).
1. Remove any object that may be blocking the fan.
2. Remove any object that may be blocking the inlet or outlet.
3. Ambient temperature too high or rectifier inlet too close to a heat source.
3. Lower the ambient temperature, relocate the heat source.
Protection
Indicator
(Yellow)
Flashing
Rectifier communication failure. Check the communication cables.
Alarm
Indicator
(Red) On
Rectifier over-voltage.
Remove the rectifier from the DC power system, restart the rectifier, and replace the rectifier if the overvoltage condition still persists.
Alarm
Indicator
(Red) Flashing
Fan not operating. Replace the rectifier.
Table 6-1
Rectifier Module Troubleshooting
Page 6-6 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Updating the Inventory after Changes to the System Have Been Made
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
When an inventory item is removed from the system, an alarm will be reported until the following procedure is performed.
Example, if a Rectifier is removed from the system, the Rectifier will not be removed from the MCA's inventory until "VIEW THE SYSTEM INVENTORY" is entered and the
"UPDATE THE INVENTORY" operation is completed.
Procedure
1) With SYSTEM OK being displayed on the MCA Interface Pad, press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed. or
In the MAIN ALARM MENU, repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION
SELECT DOWN arrow key until "GO TO FUNCTION MENU" is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key. The FUNCTION MENU is displayed.
2) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"VIEW THE SYSTEM INVENTORY" is displayed.
3) Press and release the FUNCTION SET ENTER key.
4) Repeatedly press and release the FUNCTION SELECT DOWN arrow key until
"UPDATE THE INVENTORY" is displayed.
5) Press and release the ALARM CUTOFF and FUNCTION SET ENTER keys simultaneously.
6) “ARE YOU SURE?” is displayed. Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES
(+) key.
7) Press and release the FUNCTION SET YES (+) and NO (-) keys simultaneously, to return to the beginning of the MCA menu tree.
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-7
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
REPLACEMENT INFORMATION
Replacement Assemblies
When a trouble symptom is localized to a faulty Rectifier or circuit card, that particular
Rectifier or circuit card should be replaced in its entirety. No attempt should be made to troubleshoot or repair individual components on any Rectifier or circuit card.
Refer to SAG582140000 (System Application Guide) for replacement part numbers. The
SAG can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Replacement Cables
Refer to SAG582140000 (System Application Guide) for replacement part numbers. The
SAG can be accessed via the CD (Electronic Documentation Package) furnished with your system.
Page 6-8 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
REPLACEMENT PROCEDURES
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Rectifier Replacement
Danger: Observe the instructions on top of the Rectifier as you remove it.
Note: If a Rectifier is removed without being replaced, perform the UPDATE
INVENTORY procedure found in this chapter to clear alarms.
The Rectifier weighs approximately 40 lbs.
Rectifiers can be inserted or removed with power applied (hot swappable).
Procedure
1) Observe the admonishments presented at the beginning of this chapter, and those encountered in this procedure.
2) Performing this procedure may activate external alarms. Do one of the following.
If possible, disable these alarms. If these alarms cannot be easily disabled, notify the appropriate personnel to disregard any future alarms associated with this system.
3) On the Rectifier to be removed, place the Standby/Operate switch to the
"standby" position.
Note: In the next step, a safety latch is present on the left-hand (as viewed from the front) side panel of each Rectifier. The latch is designed to prevent the
Rectifier from inadvertently being removed completely from the Bay once it has been installed. It should not be necessary to depress the safety latch release when installing the Rectifier.
4) Loosen the captive fasteners on the front of the Rectifier to be removed. Use the handle provided on the front of the Rectifier, and pull the Rectifier out until it is stopped by a safety latch located on the left-hand side panel of the Rectifier.
Refer to Figure 6-1 for latch and release location. Depress and hold the latch
release, and remove the Rectifier from the shelf. Support the bottom of the
Rectifier as you pull it out. Observe the instructions on top of the Rectifier as
you remove it.
5) Ensure that the Standby/Operate switch on the replacement Rectifier is in the
"standby" position.
6) Slide the replacement Rectifier evenly into its mounting position. It should not be necessary to depress the safety latch release. Secure the Rectifier to the bay by tightening the captive fasteners located on the Rectifier.
7) Place the Standby/Operate switch on this Rectifier to the I "operate" position.
8) Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.
9) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-9
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
SAFETY LATCH
LATCH RELEASE
OBSERVE
INSTRUCTIONS
ON TOP OF PCU AS
PCU IS REMOVED
MUST HAVE CONTROL
OF PCU WHEN LINE
REACHES EDGE OF BAY
MUST HAVE CONTROL
OF PCU WHEN LINE
REACHES EDGE OF BAY
MUST HAVE CONTROL OF
PCU WHEN LINE REACHES
FRONT OF ADJACENT PCU
GRASP SIDE IN THIS
AREA TO CARRY
OR REMOVE PCU.
CENTER OF
GRAVITY AREA
ATTENTION:
SPRING LATCH ON LEFT
SIDE OF PCU MUST BE
DEPRESSED TO REMOVE
THE PCU FROM THE BAY.
CAUTION:
WEIGHT 40 LBS (18.1kG)
GRASP SIDE IN THIS
AREA TO CARRY
OR REMOVE PCU.
Figure 6-1
208V and 480V Rectifiers
Page 6-10 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Circuit Card Replacement
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
The MCA circuit card is installed in the Primary Power/Distribution Bay and Primary
Power Only Bay. Router circuit cards are installed in the Secondary Power/Distribution
Bays, Secondary Power Only Bays, and Distribution Only Bays.
Note: Refer to Figure 6-2 as this procedure is performed.
Procedure
1) Observe the admonishments presented at the beginning of this chapter, and those encountered in this procedure.
2) Performing this procedure may activate external alarms. Do one of the following.
If possible, disable these alarms. If these alarms cannot be easily disabled, notify the appropriate personnel to disregard any future alarms associated with this system.
3) Replacing the MCA circuit card WILL result in all MCA settings being returned to
their factory default values. In Table 6-2 and Table 6-3, either manually record
all existing MCA settings or record the required settings for your site from your company's DC Plant Set Points specifications (standards).
Note: The MCA configuration can be saved by downloading the configuration using the LMS Monitoring System (if installed).
Refer to the MCA Menu Tree (Section 5886) and Chapter 2. Navigating the MCA
to manually record MCA settings. The MCA Menu Tree is provided in the separate INSTALLATION MANUAL and the CD CARRIER MANUAL (it is also provided on the CD).
4) Open the bay's front door to access the MCA circuit card mounting position.
Warning: Damage to the MCA circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
5) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
6) Remove fuse F3 that supplies input power to the MCA circuit card. Refer to
7) With an external voltmeter, verify plant voltage is correct (MCA is powered down at this point).
8) Remove any network cables from the circuit card, noting their locations for reassembly.
9) Remove the alarm cable connector TB1 from the circuit card. Note that terminal block TB1 consists of two pieces snapped together. The two pieces can be separated by first loosening the two screws; then gently pulling the one half from the other.
10) Loosen the circuit card retaining screw.
11) Remove the circuit card.
12) Set the switches of S1 on the replacement circuit card to match the settings of the removed circuit card.
13) Slide the replacement circuit card into its mounting location, ensuring the rear edge connector is firmly seated.
14) Secure the circuit card by tightening the circuit card retaining screw .
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-11
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
15) Replace fuse F3 which supplies input power to the MCA circuit card. Refer to
16) The MCA goes through an initialization routine (as detailed in Chapter 5.
Installing the Rectifiers and Initially Starting the System of the INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS [Section 5877]). During this initialization routine, check (and if required change) the MCA settings for your Site. In lieu of manually entering new MCA settings, if the old MCA configuration was downloaded via the LMS; upload the configuration. Refer to the LMS User Instructions for a procedure.
17) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
18) Close the bay's front door.
19) Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.
20) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.
Page 6-12 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Setting
Float Output Voltage
Test/Equalize Output Voltage
High Voltage Shutdown
Rectifier Current Limit
High Voltage #1 Alarm
High Voltage #2 Alarm
Battery On Discharge Alarm
Very Low Voltage Alarm
Total Distribution Load Alarm
Distribution Group A Load
Alarm
Distribution Group B Load
Alarm
High Battery Ambient
Temperature #1 Alarm
High Battery Ambient
Temperature #2 Alarm
Low Battery Ambient
Temperature #1 Alarm
Low Battery Ambient
Temperature #2 Alarm
Digital Temperature
Compensation (Slope)
Digital Temperature
Compensation (Maximum
Compensation)
Digital Temperature
Compensation (Minimum
Compensation)
Factory
Default Setting
52.00V
52.00V
57.50V
100% of Rated
Full Load
55.50V
56.50V
51.00V
47.00V
2000A
2000A
2000A
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
(0V/ C)
56.50V
50.00V
Table 6-2
MCA Basic Settings
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Required
Site Setting
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-13
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Setting
Factory
Default Setting
Required
Site Setting
MCA Audible Alarm
Silent Time Period
Manually Initiated Timed
Test/Equalize Feature
Automatic
Test/Equalize Feature
Alarm Relay
Test Feature
MCA Customer
Alarm Relays
15 Minutes
1 Hour
Disabled
45 Seconds
--
Table 6-3
MCA Advanced Setting
Program as required.
Page 6-14 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Router Circuit Card Replacement
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
The MCA circuit card is installed in the Primary Power/Distribution Bay and Primary
Power Only Bay. Router circuit cards are installed in the Secondary Power/Distribution
Bays, Secondary Power Only Bays, and Distribution Only Bays.
Note: Refer to Figure 6-2 and Figure 6-3 as this procedure is performed.
Procedure
1) Observe the admonishments presented at the beginning of this chapter, and those encountered in this procedure.
2) Performing this procedure may activate external alarms. Do one of the following.
If possible, disable these alarms. If these alarms cannot be easily disabled, notify the appropriate personnel to disregard any future alarms associated with this system.
3) Open the bay's front door to access the Router circuit card mounting position.
Warning: Damage to the Router circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
4) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
5) Remove the fuse which supplies input power to the Router circuit card. Refer to
Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 for location.
6) Remove any network cables from the circuit card, noting their locations for reassembly.
7) Loosen the circuit card retaining screw.
8) Remove the circuit card.
9) Slide the replacement circuit card into its mounting location, ensuring the rear edge connector is firmly seated.
10) Secure the circuit card by tightening the circuit card retaining screw.
11) Replace the fuse which supplies input power to the Router circuit card. Refer to
Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 for location.
12) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
13) Close the bay's front door.
14) Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.
15) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-15
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Power/Distribution Bay
(Power Only Bay Similar)
MCA/Router
Circuit Card
Figure 6-2
Power/Distribution Bay
MCA/Router Circuit Card Replacement
(Power Only Bay Similar)
Page 6-16 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Router
Circuit Card
Front door removed in illustration for clarity.
Distribution Bays
Figure 6-3
Distribution Only Bay
MCA/Router Circuit Card Replacement
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-17
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement
Two Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit cards are installed in each Power/Distribution Bay.
Four Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit cards are installed in each Distribution Only Bay.
Note: Refer to Figure 6-4 and Figure 6-5 as this procedure is performed.
Procedure
1) Observe the admonishments presented at the beginning of this chapter, and those encountered in this procedure.
2) Performing this procedure may activate external alarms. Do one of the following.
If possible, disable these alarms. If these alarms cannot be easily disabled, notify the appropriate personnel to disregard any future alarms associated with this system.
3) Open the bay's front door to access the Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit card mounting positions.
Warning: Damage to the Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit card may result if the next step is not followed.
4) Connect an approved grounding strap to your wrist. Attach the other end to a suitable ground.
5) Remove the fuse that supplies input power to the Distribution Bus Monitoring
circuit card. Refer to Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 for location.
6) Open the hinged panel to access to Distribution Bus Monitoring circuit card.
7) Remove the circuit card.
8) Slide the replacement circuit card into its mounting location, ensuring the rear edge connector is firmly seated.
9) Close the hinged panel.
10) Replace the fuse which supplies input power to the Distribution Bus Monitoring
circuit card. Refer to Figure 6-7 and Figure 6-8 for location.
11) Remove the grounding wrist strap.
12) Close the bay's front door.
13) Enable the external alarms, or notify appropriate personnel that this procedure is finished.
14) Ensure that there are no local or remote alarms active on the system.
Page 6-18 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Power/Distribution Bays
Distribution Bus
Monitoring
Circuit Card
Figure 6-4
Power/Distribution Bay
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-19
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Distribution Bays
Front Door Removed in
Illustration for Clarity
Distribution
Bus Monitoring
Circuit Card
Figure 6-5
Distribution Only Bay
Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement
Page 6-20 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Replacement
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Refer to the Installation Procedure detailed in the Installation Instructions (Section 5876).
MCA I/O Circuit Card Replacement
Refer to the Installation Procedure detailed in the Installation Instructions (Section 5876).
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-21
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Alarm, Reference, and Control Fuse Replacement
If an alarm, reference, or control fuse opens; replace with the same type and rating, or
equivalent. Refer to SAG582140000 for fuse replacement part numbers. Refer to Figure
6-7 and Figure 6-8 for alarm, reference, and control fuse locations.
Rectifier: The input of each Rectifier contains double pole/neutral fusing. This fusing is not customer replaceable. If a fuse opens, replace the entire Rectifier. An open fuse causes the Rectifiers Rectifier fail alarm circuit to activate. The input fuses have higher amperage ratings than the recommended external branch circuit protection.
Distribution Fuses: If a distribution fuse opens, the associated alarm-type fuse opens to activate the fuse alarm circuit. Replace the distribution fuse before replacing the alarm-type fuse.
Safety Fuse Covers: Safety fuse covers are provided for all alarm-type fuses installed in the system. These covers snap onto the fuses and provide protection from exposed electrical terminations when a fuse opens. Insure that the safety fuse cover is installed
after replacing a fuse. Refer to Figure 6-6 for installation details. Note that there are
different types of safety fuse covers for the different brand alarm-type fuses.
Safety Fuse Cover
P/N 248898600
(SAN-O SAX-1)
Safety Fuse Cover
P/N 248898700
(BUSSMANN GMT-X)
Figure 6-6
Installation of Safety Fuse Covers
Safety Fuse Cover
P/N 102774
(BUSSMANN GMT-Y)
Page 6-22 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
LMS / DIST / MCA
F1 F2 F3
3A 3A 3A
Figure 6-7
Power/Distribution Bay Fuse Locations
(Power Only Bay Similar)
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-23
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Front Door Removed in
Illustration for Clarity
Distribution Bays
F1 (3A) Router
F2 (3A) Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card (Bus #1 and #2)
F3 (3A) Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card (Bus #3 and #4)
Figure 6-8
Distribution Only Bay Fuse Locations
Page 6-24 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
Rectifier Fan Replacement
The rectifier fans are not field-replaceable. If a fan fails, replace the rectifier as described in this chapter.
Caution: In a system with NO redundant Rectifier Module, battery must have sufficient reserve to power the load(s) while the Rectifier Module is removed.
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-25
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
ADDING A BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION PROBE TO A PREVIOUSLY OPERATED
SYSTEM
This procedure details the steps to add a Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation Probe to a system that has been previously started, configured, and checked.
Procedure
1) Refer to the separate Installation Manual , “Chapter 3. Making Electrical
Connections ”, and mount the Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation
Probe near the batteries.
2) Refer to the separate Installation Manual , “Chapter 3. Making Electrical
Connections ”, and connect the Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation Probe to the system. The MCA automatically detects the probe and adds it to the inventory without any alarms. The default slope setting is NO
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION.
3) Refer to “Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments” of these instructions, and set the following digital battery charge temperature compensation parameters: SLOPE,
MAXIMUM COMPENSATION, and MINIMUM COMPENSATION.
4) Refer to “Chapter 4. MCA System Adjustments” of these instructions, and set the following alarm parameters: HIGH TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM, HIGH
TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM, LOW TEMPERATURE #1 ALARM, and LOW
TEMPERATURE #2 ALARM.
5) Verify that battery charge temperature compensation has begun by comparing the SYSTEM voltage reading versus the FLOAT setting. Depending on the battery ambient temperature, the SYSTEM voltage should be higher or lower than the FLOAT setting by the amount of slope V/ºC (note that SYSTEM voltage will also vary from the FLOAT setpoint depending on the load).
Note: At 25ºC, the battery charge temperature compensated SYSTEM voltage equals the FLOAT voltage setting.
Note: If the probe is disconnected or fails, a major alarm (local and extended) activates and the system returns to the FLOAT voltage setting.
Page 6-26 Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
REMOVING A BATTERY CHARGE DIGITAL TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION PROBE FROM A PREVIOUSLY OPERATED
SYSTEM
This procedure details the steps to remove a Battery Charge Digital Temperature
Compensation Probe from a system that has been previously started, configured, and checked.
Procedure
1) In the Configure Menu, set the SLOPE = 0.vvvV C/F to NO TEMPERATURE
COMPENSATION. Temperature Compensation stops and the System returns to the FLOAT voltage setting.
2) Remove the probe. The Major Alarm activates. Update inventory to clear this alarm, as described in this chapter.
Chapter 6. System Troubleshooting and Repair Page 6-27
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
Section 5877
Issue AQ, January 15, 2013
User Instructions
Spec. No. 582140000 (Models 802 NLDB , 802 NLEB and 802 NL B )
This document is property of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. and contains confidential and proprietary information owned by Emerson Network Power, Energy
Systems, North America, Inc. Any copying, use, or disclosure of it without the written permission of Emerson Network Power, Energy Systems, North America, Inc. is strictly prohibited.
NetPerform™ Optimization Services
At Emerson Network Power, we understand the importance of reliable equipment – it’s critical to both your business and your bottom line. That is why we offer a wide array of services to meet all of your network infrastructure needs.
Technical Support
Email [email protected]
1.800.800.5260
Answers technical product and system questions; determines status of warranties and contractual agreements for repair.
Phone
Services - Design, Deployment & Optimization
Email [email protected]
Phone 1.800.800.1280, option 7
FreedomCare Secure.EmersonNetworkPower.com
Spare Parts
Provides quotes and bid responses, order placement and scheduling for design, and deployment and optimization services.
Download service & maintenance reports online.
Phone
1.800.800.1280, option 5
Pricing and PO processing of spare parts, including but not limited to breakers, cables, fuses, rectifier fans, misc. breaker and fuse panels, enclosure fans, doors & switches, etc.
DC Power Depot Repair
Phone
[email protected] Creates and processes RMAs, determines
1.800.800.1280, option 6 lead times and pricing, provides repair shipping information and status.
DC Power Product Training
Phone
[email protected] Requests for quotes, order placement and
1.800.800.1280, option 8 scheduling.
For More Information
To learn more about service offerings from Emerson Network Power, please contact your sales representative, call 1-800-800-1280 option 7, email [email protected]
or visit www.EmersonNetworkPower.com/EnergySystems .
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project
Related manuals
advertisement
Table of contents
- 95 Preface
- 95 System Description
- 95 System Overview Illustrations
- 95 Power/Distribution Bay
- 95 Power Only Bay
- 95 Distribution Only Bay
- 95 Detail A - Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card
- 95 Detail B - System Monitoring and Control Section
- 95 Detail C - Monitoring and Control Section (Distribution Only Bays)
- 95 Display
- 95 Card (Secondary Power/Distribution and Power Only Bays and Distribution Only Bays)
- 95 Detail F
- 95 Details G - MCA I/O Circuit Cards
- 95 Detail H - LMS I/O Circuit Cards
- 95 Detail J - Rectifier
- 97 LMS Operating Procedures
- 97 LMS Local Port
- 97 Installing the USB Device Driver from the Furnished CD
- 97 Downloading the USB Driver from the Web
- 97 Setting up your Computer to Access the Power System
- 97 Local Controls and Indicators
- 97 Location and Identification
- 97 LMS Main/Expansion CPU Circuit Card (if furnished) Controls and Indicators
- 97 Bay LED Indicator
- 97 Distribution Bus LED Indicator
- 97 MCA Component LED Indicator
- 97 Bay Monitoring and Control Section Indicators
- 97 MCA Controls and Indicators
- 97 MCA Display
- 97 Surge Suppression Alarms (available only if a Surge Suppression Option is furnished)
- 97 Rectifier Controls and Indicators
- 97 208V and 480V Input Rectifiers
- 97 External Alarms
- 97 Starting and Stopping System Operation
- 97 Rectifier Normal Starting Procedure
- 97 Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Local)
- 98 Complete Shutdown
- 98 Local TR Shutdown
- 98 Rectifier Stopping Procedure (Remote) (if optional LMS installed)
- 98 Rectifier High Voltage Shutdown Lockout
- 98 Rectifier Emergency Shutdown and Fire Alarm Disconnect
- 98 Remote On/Off (TR)
- 98 Output Voltage Mode of Operation Selection
- 98 Placing the System into the Float Mode of Operation
- 98 Placing the System into the Test/Equalize Mode of Operation
- 98 Method 1 (Manual Test/Equalize) Procedure
- 98 Method 2 (Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize) Procedure
- 98 Method 3 (Automatic Test/Equalize) Procedure
- 98 Method 4 (External Test/Equalize) Procedure
- 98 Setting MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset Time Period
- 98 Procedure
- 98 Setting Rectifier Sequencing Delay Time Period
- 98 Procedure
- 98 Setting MCA Custom Text Messages (Names)
- 98 Procedure
- 98 Mapping LMS LED Channels to the MCA Display and MCA Customer Alarm Relays
- 98 Procedure
- 98 Using the Alarm Relay Test Feature
- 98 MCA “Power Share” Feature
- 98 Description
- 98 Operating Modes
- 98 Low Load Operation
- 98 Normal Load Operation
- 98 High Load Operation
- 98 Overload Operation
- 98 Requirements and Conditions
- 98 Programming the MCA Power Share Feature in the New Power System
- 98 Enabling Power Share
- 98 Setting the Power Share Initial Capacity Limit
- 98 Setting the Power Share Voltage Offset
- 98 Verifying the Operation of the Power Share Feature
- 98 MCA “ALTERNATE CURRENT LIMIT” FEATURE
- 98 Description
- 98 Operating Modes
- 98 Normal Current Limit Operation
- 98 Alternate Current Limit Operation
- 98 Requirements and Conditions
- 98 Programming the MCA Alternate Current Limit Feature
- 98 Enabling Alternate Current Limit
- 122 Setting the Alternate Current Limit Initial Capacity Limit
- 123 Adjustment Location and Identification
- 123 Adjusting Float Output Voltage
- 123 Adjusting Test/Equalize Output Voltage
- 123 Adjusting High Voltage Shutdown
- 123 Adjusting Rectifier Current Limit
- 123 Adjusting System High Voltage Alarm
- 123 Adjusting System Battery On Discharge Alarm
- 123 Adjusting System Very Low Voltage Alarm
- 123 Adjusting Total Distribution Load Alarm
- 123 Adjusting Distribution Group A Load Alarm
- 123 Adjusting Distribution Group B Load Alarm
- 123 Compensation Probe is installed)
- 123 Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Slope
- 123 Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Maximum Voltage
- 123 Configuring Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Minimum Voltage
- 123 Configuring Degree Units Displayed ( F or C)
- 123 Configuring the System Date and Time
- 123 Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Analog Input(s)
- 123 Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Analog Output(s)
- 123 Configuring MCA I/O Circuit Card Binary Input(s)
- 123 MCA Audible Alarm Cutoff Reset Time Period
- 123 MCA Rectifier Sequencing Feature
- 123 Manually Initiated Timed Test/Equalize Feature
- 123 Automatic Test/Equalize Feature
- 123 MCA Power Share Feature
- 123 Alarm Relay Test Feature
- 123 MCA “Alternate Current Limit” Feature
- 124 Admonishments
- 124 General Safety
- 124 Voltages
- 124 LMS Maintenance Procedures
- 124 System Maintenance Procedures
- 124 Adding a Rectifier
- 159 Contact Information
- 159 Admonishments
- 159 General Safety
- 159 Voltages
- 159 Circuit Card Handling
- 159 LMS Troubleshooting Procedures
- 159 Troubleshooting Information
- 159 General
- 159 Adjustments
- 159 MCA Messages
- 159 Rectifier Current Sharing Unbalance
- 159 Rectifier Module Fault Symptoms and Troubleshooting
- 159 Updating the Inventory after Changes to the System Have Been Made
- 159 Replacement Information
- 159 Replacement Assemblies
- 159 Replacement Cables
- 159 Replacement Procedures
- 159 Rectifier Replacement
- 159 MCA Circuit Card Replacement
- 159 Router Circuit Card Replacement
- 159 Distribution Bus Monitoring Circuit Card Replacement
- 159 MCA Customer Alarm Relay Circuit Card Replacement
- 159 MCA I/O Circuit Card Replacement
- 159 Alarm, Reference, and Control Fuse Replacement
- 159 Rectifier Fan Replacement
- 159 Adding a Battery Charge Digital Temperature Compensation Probe to a Previously Operated System
- 159 System